11773 lines
372 KiB
TeX
11773 lines
372 KiB
TeX
|
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\texinfoversion{2020-10-24.12}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
|
|||
|
|
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
|
|||
|
|
% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
|
|||
|
|
% License, or (at your option) any later version.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
|||
|
|
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
|
|||
|
|
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
|
|||
|
|
% General Public License for more details.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
|||
|
|
% along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
|
|||
|
|
% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
|
|||
|
|
% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
|
|||
|
|
% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
|
|||
|
|
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
|
|||
|
|
% https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
|
|||
|
|
% https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
|
|||
|
|
% https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
|
|||
|
|
% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
|
|||
|
|
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include a
|
|||
|
|
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
|
|||
|
|
% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
|
|||
|
|
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
|
|||
|
|
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
|
|||
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
|||
|
|
% texindex foo.??
|
|||
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
|||
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
|||
|
|
% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
|
|||
|
|
% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
|
|||
|
|
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
|
|||
|
|
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
|
|||
|
|
% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
|
|||
|
|
% full Texinfo distribution.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
|
|||
|
|
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
|
|||
|
|
% they might have appeared in the input file name.
|
|||
|
|
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for
|
|||
|
|
% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex.
|
|||
|
|
\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\chardef\other=12
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
|
|||
|
|
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
|
|||
|
|
\let\+ = \relax
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexb=\b
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexc=\c
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexcomma=\,
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexdot=\.
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexdots=\dots
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexend=\end
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexexclam=\!
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexgtr=>
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexhat=^
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexi=\i
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexindent=\indent
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexinsert=\insert
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexless=<
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexplus=+
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexslash=\/
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexsp=\sp
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexstar=\*
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptexsup=\sup
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptext=\t
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptextop=\top
|
|||
|
|
{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
|
|||
|
|
% starts a new line in the output.
|
|||
|
|
\newlinechar = `^^J
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
|
|||
|
|
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
|
|||
|
|
\let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Give the space character the catcode for a space.
|
|||
|
|
\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character.
|
|||
|
|
\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\chardef\dashChar = `\-
|
|||
|
|
\chardef\slashChar = `\/
|
|||
|
|
\chardef\underChar = `\_
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Ignore a token.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\gobble#1{}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% The following is used inside several \edef's.
|
|||
|
|
\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Hyphenation fixes.
|
|||
|
|
\hyphenation{
|
|||
|
|
Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
|
|||
|
|
ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
|
|||
|
|
data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
|
|||
|
|
man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
|
|||
|
|
par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
|
|||
|
|
spell-ing spell-ings
|
|||
|
|
stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
|
|||
|
|
wide-spread wrap-around
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
|
|||
|
|
% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
|
|||
|
|
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
|
|||
|
|
% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
|
|||
|
|
% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\loggingall{%
|
|||
|
|
\tracingstats2
|
|||
|
|
\tracingpages1
|
|||
|
|
\tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
|
|||
|
|
\tracingparagraphs1
|
|||
|
|
\tracingoutput1
|
|||
|
|
\tracingmacros2
|
|||
|
|
\tracingrestores1
|
|||
|
|
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
|
|||
|
|
\tracingscantokens1
|
|||
|
|
\tracingifs1
|
|||
|
|
\tracinggroups1
|
|||
|
|
\tracingnesting2
|
|||
|
|
\tracingassigns1
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
|
|||
|
|
\errorcontextlines16
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
|
|||
|
|
% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
|
|||
|
|
% after all.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
|
|||
|
|
\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
|
|||
|
|
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
|
|||
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
|
|||
|
|
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
|
|||
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
|
|||
|
|
\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
|
|||
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Output routine
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
|
|||
|
|
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
|
|||
|
|
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
|
|||
|
|
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
|
|||
|
|
% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
|
|||
|
|
% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
|
|||
|
|
% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
|
|||
|
|
% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
|
|||
|
|
% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one
|
|||
|
|
% mark before the section break, and one after.
|
|||
|
|
% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \currentchapterdefs,
|
|||
|
|
% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \currentsectiondefs.
|
|||
|
|
% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous
|
|||
|
|
% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section
|
|||
|
|
% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top.
|
|||
|
|
% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% See page 260 of The TeXbook.
|
|||
|
|
\def\domark{%
|
|||
|
|
\toks0=\expandafter{\currentchapterdefs}%
|
|||
|
|
\toks2=\expandafter{\currentsectiondefs}%
|
|||
|
|
\toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
|
|||
|
|
\toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
|
|||
|
|
\toks8=\expandafter{\currentcolordefs}%
|
|||
|
|
\mark{%
|
|||
|
|
\the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top
|
|||
|
|
\noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom
|
|||
|
|
\noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks,
|
|||
|
|
% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
|
|||
|
|
% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
|
|||
|
|
% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
|
|||
|
|
% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
|
|||
|
|
% first @chapter.
|
|||
|
|
\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifcase0\the\savedtopmark\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
|
|||
|
|
\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\the\savedtopmark\fi}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
|
|||
|
|
\def\currentchapterdefs{}
|
|||
|
|
\def\currentsectiondefs{}
|
|||
|
|
\def\currentsection{}
|
|||
|
|
\def\prevchapterdefs{}
|
|||
|
|
\def\prevsectiondefs{}
|
|||
|
|
\def\currentcolordefs{}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
|
|||
|
|
\newdimen\bindingoffset
|
|||
|
|
\newdimen\normaloffset
|
|||
|
|
\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Main output routine.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\chardef\PAGE = 255
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\defaultoutput
|
|||
|
|
\defaultoutput = {\savetopmark\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
|
|||
|
|
\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newbox\headlinebox
|
|||
|
|
\newbox\footlinebox
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% When outputting the double column layout for indices, an output routine
|
|||
|
|
% is run several times, which hides the original value of \topmark. This
|
|||
|
|
% can lead to a page heading being output and duplicating the chapter heading
|
|||
|
|
% of the index. Hence, save the contents of \topmark at the beginning of
|
|||
|
|
% the output routine. The saved contents are valid until we actually
|
|||
|
|
% \shipout a page.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% (We used to run a short output routine to actually set \topmark and
|
|||
|
|
% \firstmark to the right values, but if this was called with an empty page
|
|||
|
|
% containing whatsits for writing index entries, the whatsits would be thrown
|
|||
|
|
% away and the index auxiliary file would remain empty.)
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\savedtopmark
|
|||
|
|
\newif\iftopmarksaved
|
|||
|
|
\topmarksavedtrue
|
|||
|
|
\def\savetopmark{%
|
|||
|
|
\iftopmarksaved\else
|
|||
|
|
\global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark}%
|
|||
|
|
\global\topmarksavedtrue
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.
|
|||
|
|
% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer
|
|||
|
|
% and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page to be written
|
|||
|
|
% to the auxiliary files.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\onepageout#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\hoffset=\normaloffset
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
|
|||
|
|
\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\checkchapterpage
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page,
|
|||
|
|
% and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the
|
|||
|
|
% values in \headline and \footline.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Common context changes for both heading and footing.
|
|||
|
|
% Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
|
|||
|
|
% the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
|
|||
|
|
\def\commonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
|
|||
|
|
\global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makeheadline}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
|
|||
|
|
\global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makefootline}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
{%
|
|||
|
|
% Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files.
|
|||
|
|
% Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
|
|||
|
|
% take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
|
|||
|
|
% before the \shipout runs.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\atdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
|
|||
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
|||
|
|
\shipout\vbox{%
|
|||
|
|
% Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
|
|||
|
|
\ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\unvbox\headlinebox
|
|||
|
|
\pagebody{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
|
|||
|
|
% Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
|
|||
|
|
% (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
|
|||
|
|
% The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
|
|||
|
|
\vskip 24pt
|
|||
|
|
\unvbox\footlinebox
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\global\topmarksavedfalse
|
|||
|
|
\advancepageno
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Main part of page, including any footnotes
|
|||
|
|
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
|
|||
|
|
{\catcode`\@ =11
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
|
|||
|
|
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
|
|||
|
|
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
|
|||
|
|
\rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
|
|||
|
|
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Check if we are on the first page of a chapter. Used for printing headings.
|
|||
|
|
\newif\ifchapterpage
|
|||
|
|
\def\checkchapterpage{%
|
|||
|
|
% Get the chapter that was current at the end of the last page
|
|||
|
|
\ifcase1\the\savedtopmark\fi
|
|||
|
|
\let\prevchaptername\thischaptername
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
|
|||
|
|
\let\curchaptername\thischaptername
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername
|
|||
|
|
\chapterpagefalse
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\chapterpagetrue
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Argument parsing
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
|
|||
|
|
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
|
|||
|
|
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
|
|||
|
|
% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\argtorun{#2}%
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\obeylines
|
|||
|
|
\spaceisspace
|
|||
|
|
#1%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
{\obeylines %
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
|
|||
|
|
\argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Pass the result on to
|
|||
|
|
% \argcheckspaces.
|
|||
|
|
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
|
|||
|
|
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
|
|||
|
|
% @end itemize @c foo
|
|||
|
|
% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
|
|||
|
|
% by \finishparsearg.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
|
|||
|
|
\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
|
|||
|
|
\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#3}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty
|
|||
|
|
% Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
|
|||
|
|
\let\temp\finishparsearg
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\let\temp\argcheckspaces
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
% Put the space token in:
|
|||
|
|
\temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
|
|||
|
|
% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
|
|||
|
|
% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
|
|||
|
|
% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
|
|||
|
|
% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
|
|||
|
|
% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
|
|||
|
|
% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% \parseargdef\foo{...}
|
|||
|
|
% is roughly equivalent to
|
|||
|
|
% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
|
|||
|
|
% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
|
|||
|
|
\def\parseargdef#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
|
|||
|
|
\def#2{\parsearg#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\def#1##1%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Several utility definitions with active space:
|
|||
|
|
{
|
|||
|
|
\obeyspaces
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\obeyedspace{ }
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
|
|||
|
|
% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
|
|||
|
|
% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
|
|||
|
|
% should produce a line of output anyway.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
|
|||
|
|
% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
|
|||
|
|
% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% \envdef\foo{...}
|
|||
|
|
% \def\Efoo{...}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
|
|||
|
|
% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
|
|||
|
|
% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
|
|||
|
|
% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
|
|||
|
|
% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
|
|||
|
|
% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
|
|||
|
|
% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
|
|||
|
|
% special case.)
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% At run-time, environments start with this:
|
|||
|
|
\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
|
|||
|
|
% initialize
|
|||
|
|
\let\thisenv\empty
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Check whether we're in the right environment:
|
|||
|
|
\def\checkenv#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\thisenv\temp
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\badenverr
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
|
|||
|
|
\def\badenverr{%
|
|||
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
|
|||
|
|
not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\inenvironment#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx#1\empty
|
|||
|
|
outside of any environment%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
in environment \expandafter\string#1%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
|
|||
|
|
% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\end{%
|
|||
|
|
\if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\csname E#1\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
|
|||
|
|
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
|
|||
|
|
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
|
|||
|
|
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
|
|||
|
|
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
|
|||
|
|
{\catcode`@ = 11
|
|||
|
|
% Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
|
|||
|
|
% if the definition is written into an index file.
|
|||
|
|
\global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
|
|||
|
|
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @* forces a line break.
|
|||
|
|
\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @/ allows a line break.
|
|||
|
|
\let\/=\allowbreak
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
|
|||
|
|
\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
|
|||
|
|
\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
|
|||
|
|
\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\onword{on}
|
|||
|
|
\def\offword{off}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
|
|||
|
|
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
|
|||
|
|
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
|
|||
|
|
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
|
|||
|
|
% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
|
|||
|
|
% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
|
|||
|
|
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
|
|||
|
|
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
|
|||
|
|
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
|
|||
|
|
% the text is small, which looks bad.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
|
|||
|
|
% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
|
|||
|
|
% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
|
|||
|
|
% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
|
|||
|
|
% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
|
|||
|
|
% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\newbox\groupbox
|
|||
|
|
\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\envdef\group{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
|
|||
|
|
\errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\startsavinginserts
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
|
|||
|
|
% Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
|
|||
|
|
% @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
|
|||
|
|
% end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
|
|||
|
|
% the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
|
|||
|
|
% should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
|
|||
|
|
% manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
|
|||
|
|
\comment
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
|
|||
|
|
% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
|
|||
|
|
% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
|
|||
|
|
% above. But it's pretty close.
|
|||
|
|
\def\Egroup{%
|
|||
|
|
% To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
|
|||
|
|
% and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
|
|||
|
|
\endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
|
|||
|
|
\global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
|
|||
|
|
\egroup % End the \vtop.
|
|||
|
|
\addgroupbox
|
|||
|
|
\prevdepth = \dimen1
|
|||
|
|
\checkinserts
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\addgroupbox{
|
|||
|
|
% \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
|
|||
|
|
\dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
|
|||
|
|
% \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
|
|||
|
|
\dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
|
|||
|
|
% if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
|
|||
|
|
% group, force a page break.
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight
|
|||
|
|
\page
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\box\groupbox
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
|
|||
|
|
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
|
|||
|
|
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
|
|||
|
|
where each line of input produces a line of output.}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @need space-in-mils
|
|||
|
|
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\need{%
|
|||
|
|
% Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
|
|||
|
|
% paragraph.
|
|||
|
|
\par
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
|
|||
|
|
\dimen0 = #1\mil
|
|||
|
|
\dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
|
|||
|
|
\advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
|
|||
|
|
% normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
|
|||
|
|
% And a page break here is fine.
|
|||
|
|
\vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
|
|||
|
|
% main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
|
|||
|
|
% empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
|
|||
|
|
% page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
|
|||
|
|
% page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
|
|||
|
|
% page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
|
|||
|
|
% sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
|
|||
|
|
% almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
|
|||
|
|
% good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
|
|||
|
|
% example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
|
|||
|
|
% document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
|
|||
|
|
\penalty9999
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
|
|||
|
|
\kern -#1\mil
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
|
|||
|
|
\nobreak
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\let\br = \par
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @page forces the start of a new page.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @exdent text....
|
|||
|
|
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
|
|||
|
|
% That's how much \exdent should take out.
|
|||
|
|
\newskip\exdentamount
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
|
|||
|
|
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
|
|||
|
|
% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
|
|||
|
|
% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
|
|||
|
|
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
|
|||
|
|
\nobreak
|
|||
|
|
\kern-\strutdepth
|
|||
|
|
\vtop to \strutdepth{%
|
|||
|
|
\baselineskip=\strutdepth
|
|||
|
|
\vss
|
|||
|
|
% if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
|
|||
|
|
% make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
|
|||
|
|
\ifx#1l%
|
|||
|
|
\llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\null
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
|
|||
|
|
\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
|
|||
|
|
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
|
|||
|
|
% else use TEXT for both).
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
|
|||
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
|||
|
|
\def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
|
|||
|
|
\def\righttext{#2}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
|
|||
|
|
\def\righttext{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifodd\pageno
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\temp
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
|
|||
|
|
\def\includezzz#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\pushthisfilestack
|
|||
|
|
\def\thisfile{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
{%
|
|||
|
|
\makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
|
|||
|
|
\turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
|
|||
|
|
\indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
|
|||
|
|
\wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
|
|||
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
|
|||
|
|
% definitions, etc.
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter
|
|||
|
|
}\temp
|
|||
|
|
\popthisfilestack
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\filenamecatcodes{%
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\\=\other
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`~=\other
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`^=\other
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`_=\other
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`|=\other
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`<=\other
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`>=\other
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`+=\other
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`-=\other
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\`=\other
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\'=\other
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\pushthisfilestack{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
|
|||
|
|
\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
|
|||
|
|
the stack of filenames is empty.}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\thisfile{}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @center line
|
|||
|
|
% outputs that line, centered.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\center{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifhmode
|
|||
|
|
\let\centersub\centerH
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\let\centersub\centerV
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
|
|||
|
|
\let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\centerH#1{{%
|
|||
|
|
\hfil\break
|
|||
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
|
|||
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
|||
|
|
\line{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\break
|
|||
|
|
}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\centerpenalty
|
|||
|
|
\def\centerV#1{%
|
|||
|
|
% The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
|
|||
|
|
% @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
|
|||
|
|
% out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
|
|||
|
|
% prevent a page break here.
|
|||
|
|
\centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
|
|||
|
|
\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
|
|||
|
|
% @c is the same as @comment
|
|||
|
|
% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active%
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
|
|||
|
|
\cxxx}
|
|||
|
|
{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\comment\c
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
|
|||
|
|
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
|
|||
|
|
% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
|
|||
|
|
% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
|
|||
|
|
\def\noneword{none}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\asisword
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
|||
|
|
\defaultparindent = 0pt
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\defaultparindent = #1em
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\parindent = \defaultparindent
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @exampleindent NCHARS
|
|||
|
|
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
|
|||
|
|
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
|
|||
|
|
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\asisword
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
|||
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0pt
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\lispnarrowing = #1em
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @firstparagraphindent WORD
|
|||
|
|
% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
|
|||
|
|
% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
|
|||
|
|
% paragraphs.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
|
|||
|
|
% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
|
|||
|
|
% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
|
|||
|
|
% By default, we suppress indentation.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
|||
|
|
\def\insertword{insert}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
|||
|
|
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\insertword
|
|||
|
|
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
|
|||
|
|
% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
|
|||
|
|
% paragraph.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}%
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}%
|
|||
|
|
\global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
|
|||
|
|
\global\let\indent = \ptexindent
|
|||
|
|
\global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent
|
|||
|
|
\global\everypar = {}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @refill is a no-op.
|
|||
|
|
\let\refill=\relax
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored
|
|||
|
|
\let\setfilename=\comment
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @bye.
|
|||
|
|
\outer\def\bye{\chappager\pagelabels\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\message{pdf,}
|
|||
|
|
% adobe `portable' document format
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\tempnum
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\lnkcount
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\filename
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\filenamelength
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\pgn
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\toksA
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\toksB
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\toksC
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\toksD
|
|||
|
|
\newbox\boxA
|
|||
|
|
\newbox\boxB
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\countA
|
|||
|
|
\newif\ifpdf
|
|||
|
|
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% For LuaTeX
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname
|
|||
|
|
\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% Use Unicode destination names
|
|||
|
|
\txiuseunicodedestnametrue
|
|||
|
|
% Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\%=12
|
|||
|
|
\directlua{
|
|||
|
|
function UTF16oct(str)
|
|||
|
|
tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377')
|
|||
|
|
for c in string.utfvalues(str) do
|
|||
|
|
if c < 0x10000 then
|
|||
|
|
tex.sprint(
|
|||
|
|
string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
|
|||
|
|
string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
|
|||
|
|
math.floor(c / 256), math.floor(c % 256)))
|
|||
|
|
else
|
|||
|
|
c = c - 0x10000
|
|||
|
|
local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800
|
|||
|
|
local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00
|
|||
|
|
tex.sprint(
|
|||
|
|
string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
|
|||
|
|
string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
|
|||
|
|
string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
|
|||
|
|
string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
|
|||
|
|
math.floor(c_hi / 256), math.floor(c_hi % 256),
|
|||
|
|
math.floor(c_lo / 256), math.floor(c_lo % 256)))
|
|||
|
|
end
|
|||
|
|
end
|
|||
|
|
end
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}}
|
|||
|
|
% Escape PDF strings without converting
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\directlua{
|
|||
|
|
function PDFescstr(str)
|
|||
|
|
for c in string.bytes(str) do
|
|||
|
|
if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then
|
|||
|
|
tex.sprint(-2,
|
|||
|
|
string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
|
|||
|
|
c))
|
|||
|
|
else
|
|||
|
|
tex.sprint(-2, string.char(c))
|
|||
|
|
end
|
|||
|
|
end
|
|||
|
|
end
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
% The -2 in the arguments here gives all the input to TeX catcode 12
|
|||
|
|
% (other) or 10 (space), preventing undefined control sequence errors. See
|
|||
|
|
% https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/bug-texinfo/2019-08/msg00031.html
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}}
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\luatexversion>84
|
|||
|
|
% For LuaTeX >= 0.85
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest}
|
|||
|
|
\let\pdfoutput\outputmode
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax}
|
|||
|
|
\let\pdfximage\saveimageresource
|
|||
|
|
\let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource
|
|||
|
|
\let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax}
|
|||
|
|
\let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth
|
|||
|
|
\let\pdfpageheight\pageheight
|
|||
|
|
\edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin}
|
|||
|
|
\edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin}
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
|
|||
|
|
% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\pdfoutput\relax
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifcase\pdfoutput
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\pdftrue
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newif\ifpdforxetex
|
|||
|
|
\pdforxetexfalse
|
|||
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|||
|
|
\pdforxetextrue
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined\else
|
|||
|
|
\pdforxetextrue
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Output page labels information.
|
|||
|
|
% See PDF reference v.1.7 p.594, section 8.3.1.
|
|||
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|||
|
|
\def\pagelabels{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\title{0 << /P (T-) /S /D >>}%
|
|||
|
|
\edef\roman{\the\romancount << /S /r >>}%
|
|||
|
|
\edef\arabic{\the\arabiccount << /S /D >>}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Page label ranges must be increasing. Remove any duplicates.
|
|||
|
|
% (There is a slight chance of this being wrong if e.g. there is
|
|||
|
|
% a @contents but no @titlepage, etc.)
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\romancount=0 \def\roman{}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\arabiccount=0 \def\title{}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\romancount=\arabiccount \def\roman{}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\romancount<\arabiccount
|
|||
|
|
\pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \roman \arabic ] >> }\relax
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \arabic \roman ] >> }\relax
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\let\pagelabels\relax
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\pagecount \pagecount=0
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\romancount \romancount=0
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\arabiccount \arabiccount=0
|
|||
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|||
|
|
\let\ptxadvancepageno\advancepageno
|
|||
|
|
\def\advancepageno{%
|
|||
|
|
\ptxadvancepageno\global\advance\pagecount by 1
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
|
|||
|
|
% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
|
|||
|
|
% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
|
|||
|
|
% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
|
|||
|
|
% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
|
|||
|
|
% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
|
|||
|
|
% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
|
|||
|
|
% do this reliably, so we use it.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
|
|||
|
|
% which we \xdef.
|
|||
|
|
\def\txiescapepdf#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
|
|||
|
|
% No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
|
|||
|
|
% Many times it won't matter.
|
|||
|
|
\xdef#1{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
|
|||
|
|
% backslashes, and other special chars.
|
|||
|
|
\xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined
|
|||
|
|
% No UTF-16 converting macro available.
|
|||
|
|
\txiescapepdf{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
|
|||
|
|
with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
|
|||
|
|
be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
|
|||
|
|
output) for that.)}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex,
|
|||
|
|
% except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
|
|||
|
|
% very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
|
|||
|
|
% of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as
|
|||
|
|
% nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use
|
|||
|
|
% black by default, though.
|
|||
|
|
\def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
|
|||
|
|
\def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
|
|||
|
|
% RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
|
|||
|
|
% so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
|
|||
|
|
\def\setcolor#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
\domark
|
|||
|
|
\pdfsetcolor{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
|
|||
|
|
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
|
|||
|
|
\edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
|
|||
|
|
\def\currentcolordefs{}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\makefootline{%
|
|||
|
|
\baselineskip24pt
|
|||
|
|
\line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\makeheadline{%
|
|||
|
|
\vbox to 0pt{%
|
|||
|
|
\vskip-22.5pt
|
|||
|
|
\line{%
|
|||
|
|
\vbox to8.5pt{}%
|
|||
|
|
% Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
|
|||
|
|
\getcolormarks
|
|||
|
|
% Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
|
|||
|
|
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\vss
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\nointerlineskip
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
|
|||
|
|
\def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
|
|||
|
|
% others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
|
|||
|
|
% someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
|
|||
|
|
% bitmap.
|
|||
|
|
\let\pdfimgext=\empty
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
|
|||
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\closein 1
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
|
|||
|
|
% included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
|||
|
|
\immediate\pdfimage
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\immediate\pdfximage
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion<13
|
|||
|
|
#1.\pdfimgext
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
{#1.\pdfimgext}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
|
|||
|
|
\pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
|
|||
|
|
\fi}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\setpdfdestname#1{{%
|
|||
|
|
% We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
|
|||
|
|
% such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
|
|||
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
|||
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|||
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
|||
|
|
\iftxiuseunicodedestname
|
|||
|
|
\ifx \declaredencoding \latone
|
|||
|
|
% Pass through Latin-1 characters.
|
|||
|
|
% LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode.
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
|
|||
|
|
% Pass through Unicode characters.
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
|
|||
|
|
\passthroughcharsfalse
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
|
|||
|
|
\passthroughcharsfalse
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfdestname{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
|
|||
|
|
}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{%
|
|||
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
|||
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|||
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
|||
|
|
\ifx \declaredencoding \latone
|
|||
|
|
% The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark
|
|||
|
|
% strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for
|
|||
|
|
% the "PDFDocEncoding".
|
|||
|
|
\passthroughcharstrue
|
|||
|
|
% Pass through Latin-1 characters.
|
|||
|
|
% LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode
|
|||
|
|
% pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
|
|||
|
|
% For pdfTeX with UTF-8.
|
|||
|
|
% TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings,
|
|||
|
|
% but the code for this isn't done yet.
|
|||
|
|
% Use ASCII approximations.
|
|||
|
|
\passthroughcharsfalse
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% For LuaTeX with UTF-8.
|
|||
|
|
% Pass through Unicode characters for title texts.
|
|||
|
|
\passthroughcharstrue
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings.
|
|||
|
|
% Use ASCII approximations.
|
|||
|
|
\passthroughcharsfalse
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
% LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16
|
|||
|
|
% pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding
|
|||
|
|
\txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext
|
|||
|
|
}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfmkdest#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\setpdfdestname{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% used to mark target names; must be expandable.
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% by default, use black for everything.
|
|||
|
|
\def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
|
|||
|
|
\def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
|
|||
|
|
\def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
|
|||
|
|
% come from Petr Olsak
|
|||
|
|
\def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
|
|||
|
|
\else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
|
|||
|
|
\def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
|
|||
|
|
\advance\tempnum by 1
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
|
|||
|
|
% outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
|
|||
|
|
% of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
|
|||
|
|
% which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
|
|||
|
|
% #4 is the page number
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
|
|||
|
|
% Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
|
|||
|
|
% page number. We could generate a destination for the section
|
|||
|
|
% text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
|
|||
|
|
% seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
|
|||
|
|
\setpdfoutlinetext{#1}
|
|||
|
|
\setpdfdestname{#3}
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\pdfdestname\empty
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfdestname{#4}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
% Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
|
|||
|
|
\def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
|
|||
|
|
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\thischapnum{##2}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\thissecnum{0}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\thissecnum{##2}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\thischapnum{0}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\thissecnum{0}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
|
|||
|
|
% al. a second time, below.
|
|||
|
|
\def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
|||
|
|
\readdatafile{toc}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
|
|||
|
|
% The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
|
|||
|
|
% subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% We use the node names as the destinations.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Currently we prefix the section name with the section number
|
|||
|
|
% for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much
|
|||
|
|
% horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer.
|
|||
|
|
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
|
|||
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
|
|||
|
|
% document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
|
|||
|
|
% since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
|
|||
|
|
% Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
|
|||
|
|
% Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
|
|||
|
|
% their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too
|
|||
|
|
% much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents
|
|||
|
|
% we use for the index sort strings.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
|||
|
|
\setupdatafile
|
|||
|
|
% We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
|
|||
|
|
% Texinfo index files. So set that up.
|
|||
|
|
\def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
|
|||
|
|
\input \tocreadfilename
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
{\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
|
|||
|
|
]
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
|
|||
|
|
\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
|
|||
|
|
\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
|
|||
|
|
\advance\filenamelength by 1
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\nextsp}
|
|||
|
|
\def\getfilename#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\filenamelength=0
|
|||
|
|
% If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
|
|||
|
|
% snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
|
|||
|
|
\edef\temp{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
|||
|
|
\let \startlink \pdfannotlink
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\let \startlink \pdfstartlink
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
% make a live url in pdf output.
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfurl#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
% it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
|
|||
|
|
% tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
|
|||
|
|
% of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
|
|||
|
|
% people have actually reported a problem with.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
|||
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
|||
|
|
\let\/=\empty
|
|||
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|||
|
|
% do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
|
|||
|
|
% special-casing \var here?
|
|||
|
|
\def\var##1{##1}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
|
|||
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
|||
|
|
user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|||
|
|
% \pdfgettoks - Surround page numbers in #1 with @pdflink. #1 may
|
|||
|
|
% be a simple number, or a list of numbers in the case of an index
|
|||
|
|
% entry.
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
|||
|
|
\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
|
|||
|
|
\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\maketoks{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\first0\adn0
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
|
|||
|
|
\let\next=\maketoks
|
|||
|
|
\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
\next}
|
|||
|
|
\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
|
|||
|
|
{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdflink#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
|
|||
|
|
\setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
|
|||
|
|
\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% non-pdf mode
|
|||
|
|
\let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
|
|||
|
|
\let\pdfurl = \gobble
|
|||
|
|
\let\endlink = \relax
|
|||
|
|
\let\setcolor = \gobble
|
|||
|
|
\let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
|
|||
|
|
\let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
|
|||
|
|
\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% For XeTeX
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% XeTeX version check
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1
|
|||
|
|
% TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307.
|
|||
|
|
% It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941).
|
|||
|
|
% For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special
|
|||
|
|
% instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'.
|
|||
|
|
\special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010}
|
|||
|
|
% XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+.
|
|||
|
|
% It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF.
|
|||
|
|
\txiuseunicodedestnametrue
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the
|
|||
|
|
% `dvipdfmx:config' special.
|
|||
|
|
% So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement,
|
|||
|
|
% xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF
|
|||
|
|
% because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue.
|
|||
|
|
% It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753).
|
|||
|
|
\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Color support
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
|
|||
|
|
\def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
|
|||
|
|
% so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
|
|||
|
|
\def\setcolor#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
\domark
|
|||
|
|
\pdfsetcolor{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
|
|||
|
|
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
|
|||
|
|
\edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
|
|||
|
|
\def\currentcolordefs{}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\makefootline{%
|
|||
|
|
\baselineskip24pt
|
|||
|
|
\line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\makeheadline{%
|
|||
|
|
\vbox to 0pt{%
|
|||
|
|
\vskip-22.5pt
|
|||
|
|
\line{%
|
|||
|
|
\vbox to8.5pt{}%
|
|||
|
|
% Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
|
|||
|
|
\getcolormarks
|
|||
|
|
% Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
|
|||
|
|
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\vss
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\nointerlineskip
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% PDF outline support
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Emulate pdfTeX primitive
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{%
|
|||
|
|
\special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\setpdfdestname#1{{%
|
|||
|
|
% We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
|
|||
|
|
% such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
|
|||
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
|||
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|||
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
|||
|
|
\iftxiuseunicodedestname
|
|||
|
|
% Pass through Unicode characters.
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
|
|||
|
|
\passthroughcharsfalse
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfdestname{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
|
|||
|
|
}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{%
|
|||
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
|||
|
|
% Always use Unicode characters in title texts.
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
% For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16.
|
|||
|
|
% So we do not convert.
|
|||
|
|
\txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
|
|||
|
|
}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfmkdest#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\setpdfdestname{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% by default, use black for everything.
|
|||
|
|
\def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
|
|||
|
|
\def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
|
|||
|
|
\def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
|
|||
|
|
\setpdfoutlinetext{#1}
|
|||
|
|
\setpdfdestname{#3}
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\pdfdestname\empty
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfdestname{#4}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A
|
|||
|
|
<< /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary.
|
|||
|
|
% Therefore, we read toc only once.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% We use node names as destinations.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Currently we prefix the section name with the section number
|
|||
|
|
% for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much
|
|||
|
|
% horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer.
|
|||
|
|
\def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
|
|||
|
|
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\appentry\numchapentry%
|
|||
|
|
\let\appsecentry\numsecentry%
|
|||
|
|
\let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
|
|||
|
|
\let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
|
|||
|
|
\def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|||
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|||
|
|
\let\unnsecentry\numsecentry%
|
|||
|
|
\let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
|
|||
|
|
\let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16.
|
|||
|
|
% Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
|||
|
|
\setupdatafile
|
|||
|
|
% We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
|
|||
|
|
% Texinfo index files. So set that up.
|
|||
|
|
\def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
|
|||
|
|
\input \tocreadfilename
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
{\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
|
|||
|
|
]
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> }
|
|||
|
|
% ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary
|
|||
|
|
% because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it.
|
|||
|
|
% However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315,
|
|||
|
|
% ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings.
|
|||
|
|
% It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753).
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
|
|||
|
|
\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
|
|||
|
|
\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
|
|||
|
|
\advance\filenamelength by 1
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\nextsp}
|
|||
|
|
\def\getfilename#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\filenamelength=0
|
|||
|
|
% If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
|
|||
|
|
% snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
|
|||
|
|
\edef\temp{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
% make a live url in pdf output.
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfurl#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
% it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
|
|||
|
|
% tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
|
|||
|
|
% of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
|
|||
|
|
% people have actually reported a problem with.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
|||
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
|||
|
|
\let\/=\empty
|
|||
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|||
|
|
% do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
|
|||
|
|
% special-casing \var here?
|
|||
|
|
\def\var##1{##1}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
|
|||
|
|
\special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0]
|
|||
|
|
/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}%
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|||
|
|
\def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
|||
|
|
\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
|
|||
|
|
\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\maketoks{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\first0\adn0
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
|
|||
|
|
\let\next=\maketoks
|
|||
|
|
\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
\next}
|
|||
|
|
\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
|
|||
|
|
{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pdflink#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0]
|
|||
|
|
/Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}%
|
|||
|
|
\setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
|
|||
|
|
\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% @image support
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
|
|||
|
|
\def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
|
|||
|
|
% others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
|
|||
|
|
% someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
|
|||
|
|
% bitmap.
|
|||
|
|
\let\xeteximgext=\empty
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}%
|
|||
|
|
\else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\closein 1
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\xetexpdfext{pdf}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext
|
|||
|
|
\XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\def\xetexpdfext{PDF}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext
|
|||
|
|
\XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\message{fonts,}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
|
|||
|
|
% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
|
|||
|
|
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
|
|||
|
|
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
|
|||
|
|
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
|
|||
|
|
\def\baselinefactor{1}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\newdimen\textleading
|
|||
|
|
\def\setleading#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\dimen0 = #1\relax
|
|||
|
|
\normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
|
|||
|
|
\normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
|
|||
|
|
\normalbaselines
|
|||
|
|
\setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
|
|||
|
|
\vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
|
|||
|
|
depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% do nothing with this by default.
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
|
|||
|
|
% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
|
|||
|
|
% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
|
|||
|
|
\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
|||
|
|
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
|||
|
|
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
|||
|
|
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
|
|||
|
|
%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
|
|||
|
|
%%Version: 1.000
|
|||
|
|
%%EndComments
|
|||
|
|
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
|||
|
|
12 dict begin
|
|||
|
|
begincmap
|
|||
|
|
/CIDSystemInfo
|
|||
|
|
<< /Registry (TeX)
|
|||
|
|
/Ordering (OT1)
|
|||
|
|
/Supplement 0
|
|||
|
|
>> def
|
|||
|
|
/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
|
|||
|
|
/CMapType 2 def
|
|||
|
|
1 begincodespacerange
|
|||
|
|
<00> <7F>
|
|||
|
|
endcodespacerange
|
|||
|
|
8 beginbfrange
|
|||
|
|
<00> <01> <0393>
|
|||
|
|
<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
|||
|
|
<23> <26> <0023>
|
|||
|
|
<28> <3B> <0028>
|
|||
|
|
<3F> <5B> <003F>
|
|||
|
|
<5D> <5E> <005D>
|
|||
|
|
<61> <7A> <0061>
|
|||
|
|
<7B> <7C> <2013>
|
|||
|
|
endbfrange
|
|||
|
|
40 beginbfchar
|
|||
|
|
<02> <0398>
|
|||
|
|
<03> <039B>
|
|||
|
|
<04> <039E>
|
|||
|
|
<05> <03A0>
|
|||
|
|
<06> <03A3>
|
|||
|
|
<07> <03D2>
|
|||
|
|
<08> <03A6>
|
|||
|
|
<0B> <00660066>
|
|||
|
|
<0C> <00660069>
|
|||
|
|
<0D> <0066006C>
|
|||
|
|
<0E> <006600660069>
|
|||
|
|
<0F> <00660066006C>
|
|||
|
|
<10> <0131>
|
|||
|
|
<11> <0237>
|
|||
|
|
<12> <0060>
|
|||
|
|
<13> <00B4>
|
|||
|
|
<14> <02C7>
|
|||
|
|
<15> <02D8>
|
|||
|
|
<16> <00AF>
|
|||
|
|
<17> <02DA>
|
|||
|
|
<18> <00B8>
|
|||
|
|
<19> <00DF>
|
|||
|
|
<1A> <00E6>
|
|||
|
|
<1B> <0153>
|
|||
|
|
<1C> <00F8>
|
|||
|
|
<1D> <00C6>
|
|||
|
|
<1E> <0152>
|
|||
|
|
<1F> <00D8>
|
|||
|
|
<21> <0021>
|
|||
|
|
<22> <201D>
|
|||
|
|
<27> <2019>
|
|||
|
|
<3C> <00A1>
|
|||
|
|
<3D> <003D>
|
|||
|
|
<3E> <00BF>
|
|||
|
|
<5C> <201C>
|
|||
|
|
<5F> <02D9>
|
|||
|
|
<60> <2018>
|
|||
|
|
<7D> <02DD>
|
|||
|
|
<7E> <007E>
|
|||
|
|
<7F> <00A8>
|
|||
|
|
endbfchar
|
|||
|
|
endcmap
|
|||
|
|
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
|||
|
|
end
|
|||
|
|
end
|
|||
|
|
%%EndResource
|
|||
|
|
%%EOF
|
|||
|
|
}\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% \cmapOT1IT
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
|||
|
|
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
|||
|
|
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
|||
|
|
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
|
|||
|
|
%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
|
|||
|
|
%%Version: 1.000
|
|||
|
|
%%EndComments
|
|||
|
|
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
|||
|
|
12 dict begin
|
|||
|
|
begincmap
|
|||
|
|
/CIDSystemInfo
|
|||
|
|
<< /Registry (TeX)
|
|||
|
|
/Ordering (OT1IT)
|
|||
|
|
/Supplement 0
|
|||
|
|
>> def
|
|||
|
|
/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
|
|||
|
|
/CMapType 2 def
|
|||
|
|
1 begincodespacerange
|
|||
|
|
<00> <7F>
|
|||
|
|
endcodespacerange
|
|||
|
|
8 beginbfrange
|
|||
|
|
<00> <01> <0393>
|
|||
|
|
<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
|||
|
|
<25> <26> <0025>
|
|||
|
|
<28> <3B> <0028>
|
|||
|
|
<3F> <5B> <003F>
|
|||
|
|
<5D> <5E> <005D>
|
|||
|
|
<61> <7A> <0061>
|
|||
|
|
<7B> <7C> <2013>
|
|||
|
|
endbfrange
|
|||
|
|
42 beginbfchar
|
|||
|
|
<02> <0398>
|
|||
|
|
<03> <039B>
|
|||
|
|
<04> <039E>
|
|||
|
|
<05> <03A0>
|
|||
|
|
<06> <03A3>
|
|||
|
|
<07> <03D2>
|
|||
|
|
<08> <03A6>
|
|||
|
|
<0B> <00660066>
|
|||
|
|
<0C> <00660069>
|
|||
|
|
<0D> <0066006C>
|
|||
|
|
<0E> <006600660069>
|
|||
|
|
<0F> <00660066006C>
|
|||
|
|
<10> <0131>
|
|||
|
|
<11> <0237>
|
|||
|
|
<12> <0060>
|
|||
|
|
<13> <00B4>
|
|||
|
|
<14> <02C7>
|
|||
|
|
<15> <02D8>
|
|||
|
|
<16> <00AF>
|
|||
|
|
<17> <02DA>
|
|||
|
|
<18> <00B8>
|
|||
|
|
<19> <00DF>
|
|||
|
|
<1A> <00E6>
|
|||
|
|
<1B> <0153>
|
|||
|
|
<1C> <00F8>
|
|||
|
|
<1D> <00C6>
|
|||
|
|
<1E> <0152>
|
|||
|
|
<1F> <00D8>
|
|||
|
|
<21> <0021>
|
|||
|
|
<22> <201D>
|
|||
|
|
<23> <0023>
|
|||
|
|
<24> <00A3>
|
|||
|
|
<27> <2019>
|
|||
|
|
<3C> <00A1>
|
|||
|
|
<3D> <003D>
|
|||
|
|
<3E> <00BF>
|
|||
|
|
<5C> <201C>
|
|||
|
|
<5F> <02D9>
|
|||
|
|
<60> <2018>
|
|||
|
|
<7D> <02DD>
|
|||
|
|
<7E> <007E>
|
|||
|
|
<7F> <00A8>
|
|||
|
|
endbfchar
|
|||
|
|
endcmap
|
|||
|
|
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
|||
|
|
end
|
|||
|
|
end
|
|||
|
|
%%EndResource
|
|||
|
|
%%EOF
|
|||
|
|
}\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% \cmapOT1TT
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
|||
|
|
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
|||
|
|
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
|||
|
|
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
|
|||
|
|
%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
|
|||
|
|
%%Version: 1.000
|
|||
|
|
%%EndComments
|
|||
|
|
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
|||
|
|
12 dict begin
|
|||
|
|
begincmap
|
|||
|
|
/CIDSystemInfo
|
|||
|
|
<< /Registry (TeX)
|
|||
|
|
/Ordering (OT1TT)
|
|||
|
|
/Supplement 0
|
|||
|
|
>> def
|
|||
|
|
/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
|
|||
|
|
/CMapType 2 def
|
|||
|
|
1 begincodespacerange
|
|||
|
|
<00> <7F>
|
|||
|
|
endcodespacerange
|
|||
|
|
5 beginbfrange
|
|||
|
|
<00> <01> <0393>
|
|||
|
|
<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
|||
|
|
<21> <26> <0021>
|
|||
|
|
<28> <5F> <0028>
|
|||
|
|
<61> <7E> <0061>
|
|||
|
|
endbfrange
|
|||
|
|
32 beginbfchar
|
|||
|
|
<02> <0398>
|
|||
|
|
<03> <039B>
|
|||
|
|
<04> <039E>
|
|||
|
|
<05> <03A0>
|
|||
|
|
<06> <03A3>
|
|||
|
|
<07> <03D2>
|
|||
|
|
<08> <03A6>
|
|||
|
|
<0B> <2191>
|
|||
|
|
<0C> <2193>
|
|||
|
|
<0D> <0027>
|
|||
|
|
<0E> <00A1>
|
|||
|
|
<0F> <00BF>
|
|||
|
|
<10> <0131>
|
|||
|
|
<11> <0237>
|
|||
|
|
<12> <0060>
|
|||
|
|
<13> <00B4>
|
|||
|
|
<14> <02C7>
|
|||
|
|
<15> <02D8>
|
|||
|
|
<16> <00AF>
|
|||
|
|
<17> <02DA>
|
|||
|
|
<18> <00B8>
|
|||
|
|
<19> <00DF>
|
|||
|
|
<1A> <00E6>
|
|||
|
|
<1B> <0153>
|
|||
|
|
<1C> <00F8>
|
|||
|
|
<1D> <00C6>
|
|||
|
|
<1E> <0152>
|
|||
|
|
<1F> <00D8>
|
|||
|
|
<20> <2423>
|
|||
|
|
<27> <2019>
|
|||
|
|
<60> <2018>
|
|||
|
|
<7F> <00A8>
|
|||
|
|
endbfchar
|
|||
|
|
endcmap
|
|||
|
|
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
|||
|
|
end
|
|||
|
|
end
|
|||
|
|
%%EndResource
|
|||
|
|
%%EOF
|
|||
|
|
}\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
|
|||
|
|
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
|
|||
|
|
% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
|
|||
|
|
% Example:
|
|||
|
|
% #1 = \textrm
|
|||
|
|
% #2 = \rmshape
|
|||
|
|
% #3 = 10
|
|||
|
|
% #4 = \mainmagstep
|
|||
|
|
% #5 = OT1
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
|
|||
|
|
\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
|
|||
|
|
\csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
|
|||
|
|
\let\cmap\gobble
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% (end of cmaps)
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Use cm as the default font prefix.
|
|||
|
|
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
|
|||
|
|
% before you read in texinfo.tex.
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
|
|||
|
|
\def\fontprefix{cm}
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
|
|||
|
|
\def\rmshape{r}
|
|||
|
|
\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold
|
|||
|
|
\def\bfshape{b}
|
|||
|
|
\def\bxshape{bx}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ttshape{tt}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ttbshape{tt}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ttslshape{sltt}
|
|||
|
|
\def\itshape{ti}
|
|||
|
|
\def\itbshape{bxti}
|
|||
|
|
\def\slshape{sl}
|
|||
|
|
\def\slbshape{bxsl}
|
|||
|
|
\def\sfshape{ss}
|
|||
|
|
\def\sfbshape{ss}
|
|||
|
|
\def\scshape{csc}
|
|||
|
|
\def\scbshape{csc}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.)
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
|
|||
|
|
% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
|
|||
|
|
\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
|
|||
|
|
\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|||
|
|
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|||
|
|
\def\textecsize{1095}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf
|
|||
|
|
\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\font\smalli=cmmi9
|
|||
|
|
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
|||
|
|
\def\smallecsize{0900}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
|||
|
|
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
|||
|
|
\def\smallerecsize{0800}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\sevennominalsize{7pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\font\seveni=cmmi7
|
|||
|
|
\font\sevensy=cmsy7
|
|||
|
|
\def\sevenecsize{0700}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
|||
|
|
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
|||
|
|
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
|||
|
|
\def\titleecsize{2074}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
|
|||
|
|
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
|
|||
|
|
\def\chapecsize{1728}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\let\secbf\secrm
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
|||
|
|
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
|||
|
|
\def\sececsize{1440}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
|
|||
|
|
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
|
|||
|
|
\def\ssececsize{1200}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\font\reducedi=cmmi10
|
|||
|
|
\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
|
|||
|
|
\def\reducedecsize{1000}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
|
|||
|
|
\textfonts % reset the current fonts
|
|||
|
|
\rm
|
|||
|
|
} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
|
|||
|
|
% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
|
|||
|
|
% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
|
|||
|
|
% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\definetextfontsizex{%
|
|||
|
|
% Text fonts (10pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
|
|||
|
|
\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|||
|
|
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|||
|
|
\def\textecsize{1000}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf
|
|||
|
|
\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\font\smalli=cmmi9
|
|||
|
|
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
|||
|
|
\def\smallecsize{0900}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
|||
|
|
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
|||
|
|
\def\smallerecsize{0800}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\sevennominalsize{7pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\font\seveni=cmmi7
|
|||
|
|
\font\sevensy=cmsy7
|
|||
|
|
\def\sevenecsize{0700}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
|||
|
|
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
|||
|
|
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
|||
|
|
\def\titleecsize{2074}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\let\chapbf\chaprm
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
|||
|
|
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
|||
|
|
\def\chapecsize{1440}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Section fonts (12pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\let\secbf\secrm
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\font\seci=cmmi12
|
|||
|
|
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
|
|||
|
|
\def\sececsize{1200}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Subsection fonts (10pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\font\sseci=cmmi10
|
|||
|
|
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
|
|||
|
|
\def\ssececsize{1000}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt).
|
|||
|
|
\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
\font\reducedi=cmmi9
|
|||
|
|
\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
|
|||
|
|
\def\reducedecsize{0900}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs
|
|||
|
|
\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM
|
|||
|
|
\textfonts % reset the current fonts
|
|||
|
|
\rm
|
|||
|
|
} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Fonts for short table of contents.
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% We provide the user-level command
|
|||
|
|
% @fonttextsize 10
|
|||
|
|
% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\xiword{11}
|
|||
|
|
\def\xword{10}
|
|||
|
|
\def\xwordpt{10pt}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\textsizearg{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
%\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
|
|||
|
|
% makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup \globaldefs=1
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
|
|||
|
|
\else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\errhelp=\EMsimple
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
|
|||
|
|
% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
|
|||
|
|
% italics, not bold italics.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\setfontstyle#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
|
|||
|
|
\csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
|
|||
|
|
\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}\def\ttstylename{tt}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
|
|||
|
|
% So we set up a \sf.
|
|||
|
|
\newfam\sffam
|
|||
|
|
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% We don't need math for this font style.
|
|||
|
|
\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
|
|||
|
|
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.
|
|||
|
|
% We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\resetmathfonts{%
|
|||
|
|
\textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont
|
|||
|
|
\textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont
|
|||
|
|
\textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless
|
|||
|
|
% of the current font size.
|
|||
|
|
\scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy
|
|||
|
|
\scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl
|
|||
|
|
\scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt
|
|||
|
|
\scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings
|
|||
|
|
% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs
|
|||
|
|
% to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm)
|
|||
|
|
% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for italics
|
|||
|
|
% in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
|
|||
|
|
% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used
|
|||
|
|
% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% This all needs generalizing, badly.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\assignfonts#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newif\ifrmisbold
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size
|
|||
|
|
% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for
|
|||
|
|
% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size.
|
|||
|
|
\def\switchtolllsize{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifrmisbold
|
|||
|
|
\let\rmfont\bffont
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\csname\curfontstyle\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\switchtolsize{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifrmisbold
|
|||
|
|
\let\rmfont\bffont
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\csname\curfontstyle\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\curfontsize{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}%
|
|||
|
|
\csname rmisbold#5\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\assignfonts{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\resetmathfonts
|
|||
|
|
\setleading{#4}%
|
|||
|
|
}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false}
|
|||
|
|
\definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true}
|
|||
|
|
\definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true}
|
|||
|
|
\definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true}
|
|||
|
|
\definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true}
|
|||
|
|
\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false}
|
|||
|
|
\definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false}
|
|||
|
|
\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
|
|||
|
|
\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts
|
|||
|
|
\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
|
|||
|
|
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
|
|||
|
|
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
|
|||
|
|
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
|
|||
|
|
% can fit this many characters:
|
|||
|
|
% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
|
|||
|
|
% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
|
|||
|
|
% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
|
|||
|
|
% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
|
|||
|
|
% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
|
|||
|
|
% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
|
|||
|
|
% --karl, 24jan03.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\definetextfontsizexi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\message{markup,}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
|
|||
|
|
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
|
|||
|
|
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
|
|||
|
|
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
|
|||
|
|
% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
|
|||
|
|
% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
|
|||
|
|
% style.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\markupstylesetup
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupstylesetup\empty
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
|
|||
|
|
\def#1%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
|
|||
|
|
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
|
|||
|
|
\csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
|
|||
|
|
\csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
{
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\'=\active
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\`=\active
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
|||
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
|
|||
|
|
% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
|
|||
|
|
% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
|
|||
|
|
% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
|
|||
|
|
% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\codequoteright{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifmonospace
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
|
|||
|
|
'%
|
|||
|
|
\else \char'15 \fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \char'15 \fi
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
'%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
|
|||
|
|
% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
|
|||
|
|
% the code environments to do likewise.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\codequoteleft{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifmonospace
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
|
|||
|
|
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
|
|||
|
|
% \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
|
|||
|
|
\relax`%
|
|||
|
|
\else \char'22 \fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \char'22 \fi
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\relax`%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Commands to set the quote options.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\onword
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
= t%
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\offword
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
= \relax
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\onword
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
= t%
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\offword
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
= \relax
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
|
|||
|
|
\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Font commands.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
|
|||
|
|
% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
|
|||
|
|
% and 2) do not add an italic correction.
|
|||
|
|
\def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifusingtt
|
|||
|
|
{{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
|
|||
|
|
{\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
|
|||
|
|
\next
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
|
|||
|
|
\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
|
|||
|
|
% character) is such as not to need one.
|
|||
|
|
\def\smartitaliccorrection{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\next,%
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\next-%
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\next.%
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\next\.%
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\next\comma%
|
|||
|
|
\else\ptexslash
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
\aftersmartic
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns.
|
|||
|
|
\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
|
|||
|
|
% ttsl for book titles, do we?
|
|||
|
|
\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\aftersmartic{}
|
|||
|
|
\def\var#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
|
|||
|
|
\def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
|
|||
|
|
\smartslanted{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\let\i=\smartitalic
|
|||
|
|
\let\slanted=\smartslanted
|
|||
|
|
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
|
|||
|
|
\let\emph=\smartitalic
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
|
|||
|
|
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
|
|||
|
|
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
|
|||
|
|
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
|
|||
|
|
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
|
|||
|
|
\let\strong=\b
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @sansserif, explicit sans.
|
|||
|
|
\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
|
|||
|
|
% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
|
|||
|
|
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
|
|||
|
|
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
|
|||
|
|
% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
|
|||
|
|
% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`@=11
|
|||
|
|
\def\plainfrenchspacing{%
|
|||
|
|
\sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m
|
|||
|
|
\sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m
|
|||
|
|
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
|
|||
|
|
\sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
|
|||
|
|
\sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
|
|||
|
|
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`@=\other
|
|||
|
|
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @t, explicit typewriter.
|
|||
|
|
\def\t#1{%
|
|||
|
|
{\tt \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
|||
|
|
\null
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @samp.
|
|||
|
|
\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
|
|||
|
|
\let\indicateurl=\samp
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
|
|||
|
|
% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
|
|||
|
|
% This is a subroutine for that.
|
|||
|
|
\def\tclose#1{%
|
|||
|
|
{%
|
|||
|
|
% Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
|
|||
|
|
\spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Switch to typewriter.
|
|||
|
|
\tt
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
|
|||
|
|
\def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Turn off hyphenation.
|
|||
|
|
\nohyphenation
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\plainfrenchspacing
|
|||
|
|
#1%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\null % reset spacefactor to 1000
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
|
|||
|
|
% (But see \codedashfinish below.)
|
|||
|
|
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
|
|||
|
|
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
|
|||
|
|
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
|
|||
|
|
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
|
|||
|
|
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms.
|
|||
|
|
{
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
|
|||
|
|
\global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\global\def\code{\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\setupmarkupstyle{code}%
|
|||
|
|
% The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
|
|||
|
|
\catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
|
|||
|
|
\ifallowcodebreaks
|
|||
|
|
\let-\codedash
|
|||
|
|
\let_\codeunder
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\let-\normaldash
|
|||
|
|
\let_\realunder
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
% Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break
|
|||
|
|
% after the hyphen.
|
|||
|
|
\global\let\codedashprev=\codedash
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\codex
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish}
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\codedashfinish{%
|
|||
|
|
\normaldash % always output the dash character itself.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless
|
|||
|
|
% (a) the next character is a -, or
|
|||
|
|
% (b) the preceding character is a -.
|
|||
|
|
% E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -.
|
|||
|
|
% Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b.
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\next\codedash \else
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\codedashprev\codedash
|
|||
|
|
\else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
% we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a
|
|||
|
|
% space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}.
|
|||
|
|
\global\let\codedashprev= \next
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\normaldash{-}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\codeunder{%
|
|||
|
|
% this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
|
|||
|
|
% is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
|
|||
|
|
% will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
|
|||
|
|
% (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
|
|||
|
|
\ifusingtt{\ifmmode
|
|||
|
|
\mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
|
|||
|
|
\else\normalunderscore \fi
|
|||
|
|
\discretionary{}{}{}}%
|
|||
|
|
{\_}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
|
|||
|
|
% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad.
|
|||
|
|
% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
|
|||
|
|
% and _ on and off.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\keywordtrue{true}
|
|||
|
|
\def\keywordfalse{false}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\txiarg{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
|
|||
|
|
\allowcodebreakstrue
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
|
|||
|
|
\allowcodebreaksfalse
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
|
|||
|
|
% so use \code rather than \samp.
|
|||
|
|
\let\command=\code
|
|||
|
|
\let\env=\code
|
|||
|
|
\let\file=\code
|
|||
|
|
\let\option=\code
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional
|
|||
|
|
% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and
|
|||
|
|
% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in
|
|||
|
|
% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second
|
|||
|
|
% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target).
|
|||
|
|
\newif\ifurefurlonlylink
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% The default \pretolerance setting stops the penalty inserted in
|
|||
|
|
% \urefallowbreak being a discouragement to line breaking. Set it to
|
|||
|
|
% a negative value for this paragraph only. Hopefully this does not
|
|||
|
|
% conflict with redefinitions of \par done elsewhere.
|
|||
|
|
\def\nopretolerance{%
|
|||
|
|
\pretolerance=-1
|
|||
|
|
\def\par{\endgraf\pretolerance=100 \let\par\endgraf}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected
|
|||
|
|
% places within the url.
|
|||
|
|
\def\urefbreak{\nopretolerance \begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
|
|||
|
|
\let\uref=\urefbreak
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
|
|||
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
|||
|
|
\pdfurl{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
|||
|
|
\unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
|||
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|||
|
|
% For pdfTeX and LuaTeX
|
|||
|
|
\ifurefurlonlylink
|
|||
|
|
% PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
|
|||
|
|
\unhbox0
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
|
|||
|
|
% visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
|
|||
|
|
\unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
|
|||
|
|
\unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% For XeTeX
|
|||
|
|
\ifurefurlonlylink
|
|||
|
|
% PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
|
|||
|
|
\unhbox0
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
|
|||
|
|
% visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
|
|||
|
|
\unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\endlink
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
|
|||
|
|
\def\urefcatcodes{%
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\/=\active
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
{
|
|||
|
|
\urefcatcodes
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\setupmarkupstyle{code}%
|
|||
|
|
\urefcatcodes
|
|||
|
|
\let&\urefcodeamp
|
|||
|
|
\let.\urefcodedot
|
|||
|
|
\let#\urefcodehash
|
|||
|
|
\let?\urefcodequest
|
|||
|
|
\let/\urefcodeslash
|
|||
|
|
\codex
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% By default, they are just regular characters.
|
|||
|
|
\global\def&{\normalamp}
|
|||
|
|
\global\def.{\normaldot}
|
|||
|
|
\global\def#{\normalhash}
|
|||
|
|
\global\def?{\normalquest}
|
|||
|
|
\global\def/{\normalslash}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprebreak \&\urefpostbreak}
|
|||
|
|
\def\urefcodedot{\urefprebreak .\urefpostbreak}
|
|||
|
|
\def\urefcodehash{\urefprebreak \#\urefpostbreak}
|
|||
|
|
\def\urefcodequest{\urefprebreak ?\urefpostbreak}
|
|||
|
|
\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
|
|||
|
|
{
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\/=\active
|
|||
|
|
\global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
|
|||
|
|
\urefprebreak \slashChar
|
|||
|
|
% Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
|
|||
|
|
% slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\next/\else \urefpostbreak \fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% By default we'll break after the special characters, but some people like to
|
|||
|
|
% break before the special chars, so allow that. Also allow no breaking at
|
|||
|
|
% all, for manual control.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\txiarg{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\txiarg\wordnone
|
|||
|
|
\def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
|
|||
|
|
\def\urefprebreak{\urefallowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
|
|||
|
|
\def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\urefallowbreak}
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\wordafter{after}
|
|||
|
|
\def\wordbefore{before}
|
|||
|
|
\def\wordnone{none}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Allow a ragged right output to aid breaking long URL's. There can
|
|||
|
|
% be a break at the \allowbreak with no extra glue (if the existing stretch in
|
|||
|
|
% the line is sufficient), a break at the \penalty with extra glue added
|
|||
|
|
% at the end of the line, or no break at all here.
|
|||
|
|
% Changing the value of the penalty and/or the amount of stretch affects how
|
|||
|
|
% preferable one choice is over the other.
|
|||
|
|
\def\urefallowbreak{%
|
|||
|
|
\penalty0\relax
|
|||
|
|
\hskip 0pt plus 2 em\relax
|
|||
|
|
\penalty1000\relax
|
|||
|
|
\hskip 0pt plus -2 em\relax
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\urefbreakstyle after
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\url=\uref
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
|
|||
|
|
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
|
|||
|
|
\ifpdforxetex
|
|||
|
|
\def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
|||
|
|
\pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\endlink
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\let\email=\uref
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
|
|||
|
|
% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
|
|||
|
|
% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\txiarg{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
|
|||
|
|
\def\wordexample{example}
|
|||
|
|
\def\wordcode{code}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Default is `distinct'.
|
|||
|
|
\kbdinputstyle distinct
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
|
|||
|
|
% then @kbd has no effect.
|
|||
|
|
\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\xkey{\key}
|
|||
|
|
\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
|
|||
|
|
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
|
|||
|
|
%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
|||
|
|
%\font\keysy=cmsy9
|
|||
|
|
%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
|
|||
|
|
% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
|
|||
|
|
% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
|
|||
|
|
% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
|
|||
|
|
% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
|
|||
|
|
% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
|
|||
|
|
% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
|
|||
|
|
\nohyphenation
|
|||
|
|
\ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
|
|||
|
|
#1}\null}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
|
|||
|
|
\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\click{\arrow}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
|
|||
|
|
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
|
|||
|
|
% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
|
|||
|
|
% all-uppercase.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
|||
|
|
{\switchtolsize #1}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
|||
|
|
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\null % reset \spacefactor=1000
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
|
|||
|
|
% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
|||
|
|
{\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
|||
|
|
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\null % reset \spacefactor=1000
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\asis#1{#1}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
|
|||
|
|
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
|
|||
|
|
% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
|
|||
|
|
% which is what @var uses.
|
|||
|
|
{
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\_ = \active
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\mathunderscore{%
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active
|
|||
|
|
\def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
|
|||
|
|
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
|
|||
|
|
% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
|
|||
|
|
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\math{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already
|
|||
|
|
\tex
|
|||
|
|
\mathunderscore
|
|||
|
|
\let\\ = \mathbackslash
|
|||
|
|
\mathactive
|
|||
|
|
% make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
|
|||
|
|
\let\"=\ddot
|
|||
|
|
\let\'=\acute
|
|||
|
|
\let\==\bar
|
|||
|
|
\let\^=\hat
|
|||
|
|
\let\`=\grave
|
|||
|
|
\let\u=\breve
|
|||
|
|
\let\v=\check
|
|||
|
|
\let\~=\tilde
|
|||
|
|
\let\dotaccent=\dot
|
|||
|
|
% have to provide another name for sup operator
|
|||
|
|
\let\mathopsup=\sup
|
|||
|
|
$\expandafter\finishmath\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
|
|||
|
|
% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
|
|||
|
|
% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
{
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`^ = \active
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`< = \active
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`> = \active
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`+ = \active
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`' = \active
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\mathactive{%
|
|||
|
|
\let^ = \ptexhat
|
|||
|
|
\let< = \ptexless
|
|||
|
|
\let> = \ptexgtr
|
|||
|
|
\let+ = \ptexplus
|
|||
|
|
\let' = \ptexquoteright
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript.
|
|||
|
|
% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch
|
|||
|
|
% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the
|
|||
|
|
% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not
|
|||
|
|
% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi}
|
|||
|
|
\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi}
|
|||
|
|
\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% provide this command from LaTeX as it is very common
|
|||
|
|
\def\frac#1#2{{{#1}\over{#2}}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @displaymath.
|
|||
|
|
% \globaldefs is needed to recognize the end lines in \tex and
|
|||
|
|
% \end tex. Set \thisenv as @end displaymath is seen before @end tex.
|
|||
|
|
{\obeylines
|
|||
|
|
\globaldefs=1
|
|||
|
|
\envdef\displaymath{%
|
|||
|
|
\tex
|
|||
|
|
\def\thisenv{\displaymath}%
|
|||
|
|
$$%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\Edisplaymath{$$
|
|||
|
|
\def\thisenv{\tex}%
|
|||
|
|
\end tex
|
|||
|
|
}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
|
|||
|
|
% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
|
|||
|
|
% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\outfmtnametex{tex}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if
|
|||
|
|
% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT.
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
|
|||
|
|
% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for
|
|||
|
|
% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
|
|||
|
|
% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal
|
|||
|
|
% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
|
|||
|
|
% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the
|
|||
|
|
% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\inlinerawname{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\inlinevarname{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax
|
|||
|
|
\else\ignorespaces#2\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\inlinevarname{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\message{glyphs,}
|
|||
|
|
% and logos.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
|
|||
|
|
\def\@{\char64 }
|
|||
|
|
\let\atchar=\@
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
|
|||
|
|
\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}}
|
|||
|
|
\let\{=\lbracechar
|
|||
|
|
\let\}=\rbracechar
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
|
|||
|
|
\let\comma = ,
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
|
|||
|
|
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
|
|||
|
|
\let\, = \ptexc
|
|||
|
|
\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
|
|||
|
|
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
|
|||
|
|
\let\tieaccent = \ptext
|
|||
|
|
\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
|
|||
|
|
\let\udotaccent = \d
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
|
|||
|
|
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
|
|||
|
|
\def\questiondown{?`}
|
|||
|
|
\def\exclamdown{!`}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
|
|||
|
|
\def\imacro{i}
|
|||
|
|
\def\jmacro{j}
|
|||
|
|
\def\dotless#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
|
|||
|
|
\else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
|
|||
|
|
% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
|
|||
|
|
% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
|
|||
|
|
% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
|
|||
|
|
% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
|
|||
|
|
% \scriptscriptstyle).
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\LaTeX{%
|
|||
|
|
L\kern-.36em
|
|||
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
|
|||
|
|
\vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
|
|||
|
|
% for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
|
|||
|
|
% Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
|
|||
|
|
\count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
|
|||
|
|
\switchtolllsize A%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\vss
|
|||
|
|
}}%
|
|||
|
|
\kern-.15em
|
|||
|
|
\TeX
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode
|
|||
|
|
% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here,
|
|||
|
|
% but safer, and can't hurt.
|
|||
|
|
\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet}
|
|||
|
|
\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge}
|
|||
|
|
\def\leq{\ensuremath\le}
|
|||
|
|
\def\minus{\ensuremath-}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
|
|||
|
|
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
|
|||
|
|
% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
|
|||
|
|
% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
|
|||
|
|
% whichever is larger.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\dots{%
|
|||
|
|
\leavevmode
|
|||
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
|
|||
|
|
\dimen0 = \wd0
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\dimen0 = 1.5em
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\hbox to \dimen0{%
|
|||
|
|
\hskip 0pt plus.25fil
|
|||
|
|
.\hskip 0pt plus1fil
|
|||
|
|
.\hskip 0pt plus1fil
|
|||
|
|
.\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\enddots{%
|
|||
|
|
\dots
|
|||
|
|
\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
|
|||
|
|
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\point{$\star$}
|
|||
|
|
\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% The @error{} command.
|
|||
|
|
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\newbox\errorbox
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
|
|||
|
|
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
|
|||
|
|
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
|
|||
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
|
|||
|
|
\hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
|
|||
|
|
\advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
|
|||
|
|
\vbox{%
|
|||
|
|
\hrule height\dimen2
|
|||
|
|
\hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
|
|||
|
|
\vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
|
|||
|
|
\kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
|
|||
|
|
\hrule height\dimen2}
|
|||
|
|
\hfil}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\pounds{\ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"BF}\else{\it\$}\fi}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
|
|||
|
|
% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
|
|||
|
|
% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
|
|||
|
|
% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
|
|||
|
|
% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
|
|||
|
|
% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
|
|||
|
|
% font height.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% feymr - regular
|
|||
|
|
% feymo - slanted
|
|||
|
|
% feybr - bold
|
|||
|
|
% feybo - bold slanted
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
|
|||
|
|
% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
|
|||
|
|
% Hmm.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
|
|||
|
|
% Hope not.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\eurofont{%
|
|||
|
|
% We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
|
|||
|
|
% \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
|
|||
|
|
% installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
|
|||
|
|
% font installed.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
|
|||
|
|
% that to the current nominal size.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
|
|||
|
|
% does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
|||
|
|
% bold:
|
|||
|
|
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% regular:
|
|||
|
|
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\thiseurofont
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
|
|||
|
|
% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
|
|||
|
|
% the redefinition.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
|
|||
|
|
\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
|
|||
|
|
\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
|
|||
|
|
\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
|
|||
|
|
\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
|
|||
|
|
\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
|
|||
|
|
\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
|
|||
|
|
% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
|
|||
|
|
% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
|
|||
|
|
% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
|
|||
|
|
% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
|
|||
|
|
% the same EC font.
|
|||
|
|
\def\ogonek#1{{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
|
|||
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
|
|||
|
|
\else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
|
|||
|
|
\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
|
|||
|
|
\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
|
|||
|
|
\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format)
|
|||
|
|
% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text
|
|||
|
|
% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec
|
|||
|
|
% package and follow the same conventions.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\etcfont#1{%
|
|||
|
|
% We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
|
|||
|
|
% is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
|
|||
|
|
% quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
|
|||
|
|
% hopefully nobody will notice/care.
|
|||
|
|
\edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
|
|||
|
|
\edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifmonospace
|
|||
|
|
% typewriter:
|
|||
|
|
\font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
|||
|
|
% bold:
|
|||
|
|
\font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% regular:
|
|||
|
|
\font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\thisecfont
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
|
|||
|
|
% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
|
|||
|
|
% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\registeredsymbol{%
|
|||
|
|
$^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}%
|
|||
|
|
\hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
|
|||
|
|
}$%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
|
|||
|
|
% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
|
|||
|
|
% so we'll define it if necessary.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
|
|||
|
|
\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Quotes.
|
|||
|
|
\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
|
|||
|
|
\chardef\quoteright=`\'
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% only change font for tt for correct kerning and to avoid using
|
|||
|
|
% \ecfont unless necessary.
|
|||
|
|
\def\quotedblleft{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"10}\else{\char"5C}\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\quotedblright{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"11}\else{\char`\"}\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\message{page headings,}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
|
|||
|
|
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
|
|||
|
|
\newif\ifseenauthor
|
|||
|
|
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or
|
|||
|
|
% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete.
|
|||
|
|
\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{%
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo
|
|||
|
|
command; move your @contents command if you want the contents
|
|||
|
|
after the title page.}}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{%
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo
|
|||
|
|
command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you
|
|||
|
|
want the contents after the title page.}}%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\envdef\titlepage{%
|
|||
|
|
% Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\parindent=0pt \textfonts
|
|||
|
|
% Leave some space at the very top of the page.
|
|||
|
|
\vglue\titlepagetopglue
|
|||
|
|
% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
|
|||
|
|
\finishedtitlepagetrue
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
|
|||
|
|
% at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
|
|||
|
|
\let\oldpage = \page
|
|||
|
|
\def\page{%
|
|||
|
|
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
|||
|
|
\finishtitlepage
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\let\page = \oldpage
|
|||
|
|
\page
|
|||
|
|
\null
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\Etitlepage{%
|
|||
|
|
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
|||
|
|
\finishtitlepage
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
% It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
|
|||
|
|
% because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
|
|||
|
|
% If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
|
|||
|
|
% after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
|
|||
|
|
\oldpage
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
|
|||
|
|
% in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
|
|||
|
|
\HEADINGSon
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\finishtitlepage{%
|
|||
|
|
\vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
|
|||
|
|
\vskip\titlepagebottomglue
|
|||
|
|
\finishedtitlepagetrue
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
|
|||
|
|
% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used
|
|||
|
|
% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should
|
|||
|
|
% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\raggedtitlesettings{%
|
|||
|
|
\rm
|
|||
|
|
\hyphenpenalty=10000
|
|||
|
|
\parindent=0pt
|
|||
|
|
\tolerance=5000
|
|||
|
|
\ptexraggedright
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont
|
|||
|
|
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\title{%
|
|||
|
|
\checkenv\titlepage
|
|||
|
|
\vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
|
|||
|
|
% print a rule at the page bottom also.
|
|||
|
|
\finishedtitlepagefalse
|
|||
|
|
\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\subtitle{%
|
|||
|
|
\checkenv\titlepage
|
|||
|
|
{\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @author should come last, but may come many times.
|
|||
|
|
% It can also be used inside @quotation.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\author{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{\quotation}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\thisenv\temp
|
|||
|
|
\def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\checkenv\titlepage
|
|||
|
|
\ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
|
|||
|
|
{\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Set up page headings and footings.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\let\thispage=\folio
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\evenchapheadline% headline on even pages with a new chapter
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\oddchapheadline % headline on odd pages with a new chapter
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables
|
|||
|
|
\headline={{\textfonts\rm
|
|||
|
|
\ifchapterpage
|
|||
|
|
\ifodd\pageno\the\oddchapheadline\else\the\evenchapheadline\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifodd\pageno\the\oddheadline\else\the\evenheadline\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
|
|||
|
|
\else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
|
|||
|
|
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Commands to set those variables.
|
|||
|
|
% For example, this is what @headings on does
|
|||
|
|
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
|
|||
|
|
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
|
|||
|
|
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
|
|||
|
|
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
|
|||
|
|
\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
|||
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}
|
|||
|
|
\global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
|
|||
|
|
\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
|||
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
|||
|
|
\global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
|
|||
|
|
\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
|||
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
|
|||
|
|
\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
|||
|
|
\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
|||
|
|
\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
|
|||
|
|
% @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
|
|||
|
|
\global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt
|
|||
|
|
\global\advance\vsize by -12pt
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
|
|||
|
|
% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% The same set of arguments for:
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% @oddheadingmarks
|
|||
|
|
% @evenfootingmarks
|
|||
|
|
% @oddfootingmarks
|
|||
|
|
% @everyheadingmarks
|
|||
|
|
% @everyfootingmarks
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks,
|
|||
|
|
% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of
|
|||
|
|
% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
|
|||
|
|
\headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
|
|||
|
|
\headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
|
|||
|
|
% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
|
|||
|
|
\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\everyheadingmarks bottom
|
|||
|
|
\everyfootingmarks bottom
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
|
|||
|
|
% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
|
|||
|
|
% @headings off turns them off.
|
|||
|
|
% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
|
|||
|
|
% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
|||
|
|
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
|||
|
|
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
|
|||
|
|
% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
|
|||
|
|
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
|
|||
|
|
\evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}\evenchapheadline={\hfil}%
|
|||
|
|
\oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}\oddchapheadline={\hfil}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
|
|||
|
|
\HEADINGSoff % it's the default
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
|
|||
|
|
\def\pageone{
|
|||
|
|
\global\pageno=1
|
|||
|
|
\global\arabiccount = \pagecount
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
|
|||
|
|
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
|
|||
|
|
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
|
|||
|
|
% edge of all pages.
|
|||
|
|
\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
|
|||
|
|
\pageone
|
|||
|
|
\HEADINGSdoublex
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
|
|||
|
|
% page number on top right.
|
|||
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
|
|||
|
|
\pageone
|
|||
|
|
\HEADINGSsinglex
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
|
|||
|
|
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
|
|||
|
|
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
|
|||
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|||
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|||
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
|||
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|||
|
|
\global\evenchapheadline={\line{\folio\hfil}}
|
|||
|
|
\global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
|
|||
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
|
|||
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
|
|||
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|||
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|||
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|||
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|||
|
|
\global\evenchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
|
|||
|
|
\global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
|
|||
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% for @setchapternewpage off
|
|||
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsinglechapoff{%
|
|||
|
|
\pageone
|
|||
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|||
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|||
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|||
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|||
|
|
\global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline
|
|||
|
|
\global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline
|
|||
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Subroutines used in generating headings
|
|||
|
|
% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
|
|||
|
|
% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
|
|||
|
|
% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\today\thisisundefined
|
|||
|
|
\def\today{%
|
|||
|
|
\number\day\space
|
|||
|
|
\ifcase\month
|
|||
|
|
\or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
|
|||
|
|
\or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
|
|||
|
|
\or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\space\number\year}
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
|
|||
|
|
% It generates no output of its own.
|
|||
|
|
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
|
|||
|
|
\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\message{tables,}
|
|||
|
|
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% default indentation of table text
|
|||
|
|
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
|
|||
|
|
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
|
|||
|
|
\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
|
|||
|
|
% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
|
|||
|
|
\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
|
|||
|
|
\newdimen\itemmax
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
|
|||
|
|
% these defs.
|
|||
|
|
% They also define \itemindex
|
|||
|
|
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
|||
|
|
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
|
|||
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
|||
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\tableindent
|
|||
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
\itemindex{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
|
|||
|
|
% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
|
|||
|
|
% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
|
|||
|
|
% command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
|
|||
|
|
% horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
|
|||
|
|
% but leave it ragged-right.
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
|
|||
|
|
\advance\hsize by\tableindent
|
|||
|
|
\advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
|
|||
|
|
\leavevmode\unhbox0\par
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
|
|||
|
|
% \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
|
|||
|
|
\nobreak \vskip-\parskip
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
|
|||
|
|
% what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
|
|||
|
|
% \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
|
|||
|
|
% cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
|
|||
|
|
% bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
|
|||
|
|
% \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\penalty 10001
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
|
|||
|
|
% following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
|
|||
|
|
\noindent
|
|||
|
|
% Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
|
|||
|
|
% the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
|
|||
|
|
% eventually be printed.
|
|||
|
|
\nobreak\kern-\tableindent
|
|||
|
|
\dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
|
|||
|
|
\unhbox0
|
|||
|
|
\nobreak\kern\dimen0
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
|
|||
|
|
\envdef\table{%
|
|||
|
|
\let\itemindex\gobble
|
|||
|
|
\tablecheck{table}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\envdef\ftable{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
|
|||
|
|
\tablecheck{ftable}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\envdef\vtable{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
|
|||
|
|
\tablecheck{vtable}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\tablecheck#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
|
|||
|
|
that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\let\next\tablex
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\next
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\tablex#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\itemindicate{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\parsearg\tabley
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\tabley#1{%
|
|||
|
|
{%
|
|||
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|||
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter
|
|||
|
|
}\temp \endtablez
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
|
|||
|
|
\aboveenvbreak
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
|
|||
|
|
\itemmax=\tableindent
|
|||
|
|
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
|||
|
|
\advance \leftskip by \tableindent
|
|||
|
|
\exdentamount=\tableindent
|
|||
|
|
\parindent = 0pt
|
|||
|
|
\parskip = \smallskipamount
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
|||
|
|
\let\item = \internalBitem
|
|||
|
|
\let\itemx = \internalBitemx
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
|
|||
|
|
\let\Eftable\Etable
|
|||
|
|
\let\Evtable\Etable
|
|||
|
|
\let\Eitemize\Etable
|
|||
|
|
\let\Eenumerate\Etable
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newcount \itemno
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\doitemize#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\aboveenvbreak
|
|||
|
|
\itemmax=\itemindent
|
|||
|
|
\advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
|||
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
|
|||
|
|
\exdentamount=\itemindent
|
|||
|
|
\parindent=0pt
|
|||
|
|
\parskip=\smallskipamount
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says
|
|||
|
|
% something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
|
|||
|
|
% right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
|
|||
|
|
% world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
|
|||
|
|
% the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
|
|||
|
|
\def\itemcontents{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\item=\itemizeitem
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\itemizeitem{%
|
|||
|
|
\advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
|
|||
|
|
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
|
|||
|
|
{%
|
|||
|
|
% If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
|
|||
|
|
% \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
|
|||
|
|
% done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
|
|||
|
|
% parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
|
|||
|
|
% other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
|
|||
|
|
% usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
|
|||
|
|
% space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
|
|||
|
|
% that's the theory.
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
|
|||
|
|
\noindent
|
|||
|
|
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifinner\else
|
|||
|
|
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item.
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
% We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an
|
|||
|
|
% @itemize looks awful there.
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\flushcr
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
|
|||
|
|
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
|
|||
|
|
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
|
|||
|
|
% argument is the same as `1'.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
|
|||
|
|
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
|
|||
|
|
% If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
|
|||
|
|
\def\thearg{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
|
|||
|
|
% letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
|
|||
|
|
% (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
|
|||
|
|
% This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
|
|||
|
|
% all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\rest\empty
|
|||
|
|
% Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
|
|||
|
|
% A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
|
|||
|
|
% An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
|
|||
|
|
% not equal to itself.
|
|||
|
|
% Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
|
|||
|
|
% continuing to look for a <number>.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
|
|||
|
|
\numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% It's a letter.
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
|
|||
|
|
\lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
|
|||
|
|
\numericenumerate
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
|
|||
|
|
% given in \thearg.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\numericenumerate{%
|
|||
|
|
\itemno = \thearg
|
|||
|
|
\startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
|||
|
|
\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
|
|||
|
|
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
|||
|
|
\startenumeration{%
|
|||
|
|
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\itemno=0
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
|||
|
|
alphabet}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\char\lccode\itemno
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
|||
|
|
\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
|
|||
|
|
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
|||
|
|
\startenumeration{%
|
|||
|
|
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\itemno=0
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
|||
|
|
alphabet}
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\char\uccode\itemno
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
|
|||
|
|
% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
|
|||
|
|
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\startenumeration#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\advance\itemno by -1
|
|||
|
|
\doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
|
|||
|
|
% to @enumerate.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
|||
|
|
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @multitable macros
|
|||
|
|
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
|
|||
|
|
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
|
|||
|
|
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
|
|||
|
|
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% To make preamble:
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
|
|||
|
|
% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
|
|||
|
|
% @item ...
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
|
|||
|
|
% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
|
|||
|
|
% columns as desired.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Or use a template:
|
|||
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
|||
|
|
% @item ...
|
|||
|
|
% using the widest term desired in each column.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
|
|||
|
|
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
|
|||
|
|
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
|
|||
|
|
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
|
|||
|
|
% if they are.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Sample multitable:
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
|||
|
|
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
|
|||
|
|
% @item
|
|||
|
|
% first col stuff
|
|||
|
|
% @tab
|
|||
|
|
% second col stuff
|
|||
|
|
% @tab
|
|||
|
|
% third col
|
|||
|
|
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
|
|||
|
|
% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
|
|||
|
|
% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
|
|||
|
|
% @end multitable
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
|
|||
|
|
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
|
|||
|
|
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
|
|||
|
|
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
|
|||
|
|
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
|
|||
|
|
% to baseline.
|
|||
|
|
% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\newskip\multitableparskip
|
|||
|
|
\newskip\multitableparindent
|
|||
|
|
\newdimen\multitablecolspace
|
|||
|
|
\newskip\multitablelinespace
|
|||
|
|
\multitableparskip=0pt
|
|||
|
|
\multitableparindent=6pt
|
|||
|
|
\multitablecolspace=12pt
|
|||
|
|
\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\endsetuptable\relax
|
|||
|
|
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
|
|||
|
|
\let\columnfractions\relax
|
|||
|
|
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
|
|||
|
|
\newif\ifsetpercent
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
|
|||
|
|
% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
|
|||
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
|
|||
|
|
\setuptable
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\colcount
|
|||
|
|
\def\setuptable#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\firstarg{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
|
|||
|
|
\let\go = \relax
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
|
|||
|
|
\global\setpercenttrue
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifsetpercent
|
|||
|
|
\let\go\pickupwholefraction
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
|||
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
|
|||
|
|
% separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
|
|||
|
|
% Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
|
|||
|
|
% we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
|
|||
|
|
\def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\let\go = \setuptable
|
|||
|
|
\fi%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\go
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% multitable-only commands.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments
|
|||
|
|
% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an
|
|||
|
|
% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to
|
|||
|
|
% undo it ourselves.
|
|||
|
|
\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
|
|||
|
|
\def\headitem{%
|
|||
|
|
\checkenv\multitable
|
|||
|
|
\crcr
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings
|
|||
|
|
\global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
|
|||
|
|
\the\everytab % for the first item
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% default for tables with no headings.
|
|||
|
|
\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
|
|||
|
|
% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
|
|||
|
|
% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
|
|||
|
|
% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
|
|||
|
|
\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\envdef\multitable{%
|
|||
|
|
\vskip\parskip
|
|||
|
|
\startsavinginserts
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
|
|||
|
|
% We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
|
|||
|
|
% contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
|
|||
|
|
% \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
|
|||
|
|
\def\item{\crcr}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\tolerance=9500
|
|||
|
|
\hbadness=9500
|
|||
|
|
\setmultitablespacing
|
|||
|
|
\parskip=\multitableparskip
|
|||
|
|
\parindent=\multitableparindent
|
|||
|
|
\overfullrule=0pt
|
|||
|
|
\global\colcount=0
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\everycr = {%
|
|||
|
|
\noalign{%
|
|||
|
|
\global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem.
|
|||
|
|
\global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Check for saved footnotes, etc.:
|
|||
|
|
\checkinserts
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset:
|
|||
|
|
\headitemcrhook
|
|||
|
|
\global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parsearg\domultitable
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\domultitable#1{%
|
|||
|
|
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
|
|||
|
|
\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
|
|||
|
|
% be used as many times as user calls for columns.
|
|||
|
|
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
|
|||
|
|
% continue for many paragraphs if desired.
|
|||
|
|
\halign\bgroup &%
|
|||
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
|||
|
|
\multistrut
|
|||
|
|
\vtop{%
|
|||
|
|
% Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
|
|||
|
|
\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
|
|||
|
|
% we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
|
|||
|
|
% the first one.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
|
|||
|
|
% to the width of each template entry.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
|
|||
|
|
% use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
|
|||
|
|
% will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
|
|||
|
|
% left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
|
|||
|
|
\rightskip=0pt
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\colcount=1
|
|||
|
|
% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
|
|||
|
|
\advance\hsize by\leftskip
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\ifsetpercent \else
|
|||
|
|
% If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
|
|||
|
|
% we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
|
|||
|
|
\advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
% In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
|
|||
|
|
\leftskip=\multitablecolspace
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
% Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
|
|||
|
|
% blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
|
|||
|
|
% box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
|
|||
|
|
% For example:
|
|||
|
|
% @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
|
|||
|
|
% @item @code{#}
|
|||
|
|
% @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
|
|||
|
|
% Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
|
|||
|
|
% marking characters.
|
|||
|
|
\noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
|
|||
|
|
}\cr
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\Emultitable{%
|
|||
|
|
\crcr
|
|||
|
|
\egroup % end the \halign
|
|||
|
|
\global\setpercentfalse
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\setmultitablespacing{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
|
|||
|
|
% \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
|
|||
|
|
% this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
|
|||
|
|
% See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
|||
|
|
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
|
|||
|
|
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
|
|||
|
|
% table. If not, do nothing.
|
|||
|
|
% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
|
|||
|
|
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
|||
|
|
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
|||
|
|
% than skip between lines in the table.
|
|||
|
|
\fi%
|
|||
|
|
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
|
|||
|
|
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
|||
|
|
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
|||
|
|
% than skip between lines in the table.
|
|||
|
|
\fi}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\message{conditionals,}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
|
|||
|
|
% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
|
|||
|
|
% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
|
|||
|
|
% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
|
|||
|
|
% attempt to close an environment group.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\makecond#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\makecond{iftex}
|
|||
|
|
\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
|
|||
|
|
\makecond{ifnothtml}
|
|||
|
|
\makecond{ifnotinfo}
|
|||
|
|
\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
|
|||
|
|
\makecond{ifnotxml}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\doignorecount
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
% Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
|
|||
|
|
\obeylines
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\@ = \other
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\{ = \other
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\} = \other
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
|
|||
|
|
\spaceisspace
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Count number of #1's that we've seen.
|
|||
|
|
\doignorecount = 0
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
|
|||
|
|
\dodoignore{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
|
|||
|
|
\obeylines %
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\dodoignore#1{%
|
|||
|
|
% #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
|
|||
|
|
\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
|
|||
|
|
% line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
|
|||
|
|
% example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
|
|||
|
|
\long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% And now expand that command.
|
|||
|
|
\doignoretext ^^M%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
|
|||
|
|
\let\next\doignoretextzzz
|
|||
|
|
\else % Found a nested condition, ...
|
|||
|
|
\advance\doignorecount by 1
|
|||
|
|
\let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
|
|||
|
|
% If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
|
|||
|
|
\let\next\enddoignore
|
|||
|
|
\else % Still inside a nested condition.
|
|||
|
|
\advance\doignorecount by -1
|
|||
|
|
\let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\next
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Finish off ignored text.
|
|||
|
|
{ \obeylines%
|
|||
|
|
% Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
|
|||
|
|
% environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
|
|||
|
|
% would result in a blank line in the output.
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
|
|||
|
|
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
|
|||
|
|
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
|
|||
|
|
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
|
|||
|
|
% didn't need it.
|
|||
|
|
% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
|
|||
|
|
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
|
|||
|
|
{%
|
|||
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|||
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
|||
|
|
\edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty
|
|||
|
|
\next{}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\setzzz#2\endsetzzz
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
|
|||
|
|
\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\clear{%
|
|||
|
|
{%
|
|||
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|||
|
|
\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
|
|||
|
|
\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
|
|||
|
|
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
|
|||
|
|
{
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
|
|||
|
|
\let\value = \expandablevalue
|
|||
|
|
% We don't want these characters active, ...
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
|
|||
|
|
% ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
|
|||
|
|
% we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
|
|||
|
|
% So \let them to their normal equivalents.
|
|||
|
|
\let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
|||
|
|
{[No value for ``#1'']}%
|
|||
|
|
\message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\csname SET#1\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the
|
|||
|
|
% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when
|
|||
|
|
% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does.
|
|||
|
|
% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it
|
|||
|
|
% will be set by the time it is read back in.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here.
|
|||
|
|
\def\dummyvalue#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
|||
|
|
\string\value{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\csname SET#1\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value
|
|||
|
|
% if possible, otherwise sort late.
|
|||
|
|
\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
|||
|
|
ZZZZZZZ%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\csname SET#1\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
|
|||
|
|
% with @set.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call
|
|||
|
|
% \makecond and then redefine.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\makecond{ifset}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\doifset#1#2{%
|
|||
|
|
{%
|
|||
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|||
|
|
\let\next=\empty
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
|
|||
|
|
#1% If not set, redefine \next.
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter
|
|||
|
|
}\next
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
|
|||
|
|
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
|
|||
|
|
% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
|
|||
|
|
% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\makecond{ifclear}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
|
|||
|
|
% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the
|
|||
|
|
% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
|
|||
|
|
% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\makecond{ifcommanddefined}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
|
|||
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|||
|
|
\let\next=\empty
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
|
|||
|
|
#1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter
|
|||
|
|
}\next
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
|
|||
|
|
\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
|
|||
|
|
\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
|
|||
|
|
% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
|
|||
|
|
\set txicommandconditionals
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
|
|||
|
|
% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
|
|||
|
|
\let\dircategory=\comment
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @defininfoenclose.
|
|||
|
|
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\message{indexing,}
|
|||
|
|
% Index generation facilities
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
|
|||
|
|
% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
|
|||
|
|
\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX.
|
|||
|
|
% It automatically defines \IXindex such that
|
|||
|
|
% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX.
|
|||
|
|
% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for
|
|||
|
|
% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX.
|
|||
|
|
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
|
|||
|
|
% for the sake of vms.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\newindex#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
|
|||
|
|
\noexpand\doindex{#1}}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\newcodeindex#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
|
|||
|
|
\noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% The default indices:
|
|||
|
|
\newindex{cp}% concepts,
|
|||
|
|
\newcodeindex{fn}% functions,
|
|||
|
|
\newcodeindex{vr}% variables,
|
|||
|
|
\newcodeindex{tp}% types,
|
|||
|
|
\newcodeindex{ky}% keys
|
|||
|
|
\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
|
|||
|
|
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
|
|||
|
|
% inside @code.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
|
|||
|
|
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
|
|||
|
|
% #3 the target index (bar).
|
|||
|
|
\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
|
|||
|
|
\requireopenindexfile{#3}%
|
|||
|
|
% redefine \fooindfile:
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
|
|||
|
|
% redefine \fooindex:
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros.
|
|||
|
|
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
|
|||
|
|
% and it is the two-letter name of the index.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx}
|
|||
|
|
\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
|
|||
|
|
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx}
|
|||
|
|
\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\docind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Used for the aux, toc and index files to prevent expansion of Texinfo
|
|||
|
|
% commands.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\atdummies{%
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyletter\@%
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyletter\ %
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyletter\{%
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyletter\}%
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyletter\&%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Do the redefinitions.
|
|||
|
|
\definedummies
|
|||
|
|
\otherbackslash
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
|
|||
|
|
% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words,
|
|||
|
|
% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
|
|||
|
|
% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
|
|||
|
|
% from whatever follows.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
|
|||
|
|
% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
|
|||
|
|
% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
|
|||
|
|
% space.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Called from \atdummies to prevent the expansion of commands.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\definedummies{%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\commondummyword\definedummyword
|
|||
|
|
\let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter
|
|||
|
|
\let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent
|
|||
|
|
\commondummiesnofonts
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyletter\_%
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyletter\-%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Non-English letters.
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\AA
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\AE
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\DH
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\L
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\O
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\OE
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\TH
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\aa
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\ae
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\dh
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\exclamdown
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\l
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\o
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\oe
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\ordf
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\ordm
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\questiondown
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\ss
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\th
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\bf
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\gtr
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\hat
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\less
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\sf
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\sl
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\tclose
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\tt
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\LaTeX
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\TeX
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Assorted special characters.
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\ampchar
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\atchar
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\arrow
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\backslashchar
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\bullet
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\comma
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\copyright
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\registeredsymbol
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\dots
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\enddots
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\entrybreak
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\equiv
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\error
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\euro
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\expansion
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\geq
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\guillemetleft
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\guillemetright
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\guilsinglleft
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\guilsinglright
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\lbracechar
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\leq
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\mathopsup
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\minus
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\ogonek
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\pounds
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\point
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\print
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\quotedblbase
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\quotedblleft
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\quotedblright
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\quoteleft
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\quoteright
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\quotesinglbase
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\rbracechar
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\result
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\sub
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\sup
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\textdegree
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\definedummyword\subentry
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
|
|||
|
|
\macrolist
|
|||
|
|
\let\value\dummyvalue
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts.
|
|||
|
|
% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before
|
|||
|
|
% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
|
|||
|
|
% Control letters and accents.
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyletter\!%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyaccent\"%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyaccent\'%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyletter\*%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyaccent\,%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyletter\.%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyletter\/%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyletter\:%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyaccent\=%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyletter\?%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyaccent\^%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyaccent\`%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyaccent\~%
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\u
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\v
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\H
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\dotaccent
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\ogonek
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\ringaccent
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\tieaccent
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\ubaraccent
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\udotaccent
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\dotless
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Texinfo font commands.
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\b
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\i
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\r
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\sansserif
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\sc
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\slanted
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\t
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Commands that take arguments.
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\abbr
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\acronym
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\anchor
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\cite
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\code
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\command
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\dfn
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\dmn
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\email
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\emph
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\env
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\file
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\image
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\indicateurl
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\inforef
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\kbd
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\key
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\math
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\option
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\pxref
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\ref
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\samp
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\strong
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\tie
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\U
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\uref
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\url
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\var
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\verb
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\w
|
|||
|
|
\commondummyword\xref
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\let\indexlbrace\relax
|
|||
|
|
\let\indexrbrace\relax
|
|||
|
|
\let\indexatchar\relax
|
|||
|
|
\let\indexbackslash\relax
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
{\catcode`\@=0
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\\=13
|
|||
|
|
@gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
{
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\<=13
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\-=13
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\`=13
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else
|
|||
|
|
% @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term.
|
|||
|
|
% (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.)
|
|||
|
|
\let`=\empty
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else
|
|||
|
|
\backslashdisappear
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else
|
|||
|
|
\def-{}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else
|
|||
|
|
\def<{}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else
|
|||
|
|
\def\@{}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{%
|
|||
|
|
\let-\normaldash
|
|||
|
|
\let<\normalless
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
|
|||
|
|
% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
|
|||
|
|
% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
|
|||
|
|
% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\indexnofonts{%
|
|||
|
|
% Accent commands should become @asis.
|
|||
|
|
\def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
|
|||
|
|
% We can just ignore other control letters.
|
|||
|
|
\def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
|
|||
|
|
% All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
|
|||
|
|
\let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent
|
|||
|
|
\commondummiesnofonts
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
|
|||
|
|
% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
|
|||
|
|
% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
|
|||
|
|
%\let\tt=\asis
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\ { }%
|
|||
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}%
|
|||
|
|
\uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}%
|
|||
|
|
\let\lbracechar\{%
|
|||
|
|
\let\rbracechar\}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\do\indexnofontsdef
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Non-English letters.
|
|||
|
|
\do\AA{AA}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\AE{AE}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\DH{DZZ}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\L{L}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\OE{OE}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\O{O}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\TH{TH}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\aa{aa}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\ae{ae}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\dh{dzz}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\exclamdown{!}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\l{l}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\oe{oe}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\ordf{a}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\ordm{o}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\o{o}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\questiondown{?}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\ss{ss}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\th{th}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\do\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\TeX{TeX}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Assorted special characters.
|
|||
|
|
\do\atchar{@}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\arrow{->}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\bullet{bullet}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\comma{,}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\copyright{copyright}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\dots{...}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\enddots{...}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\equiv{==}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\error{error}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\euro{euro}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\expansion{==>}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\geq{>=}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\guillemetleft{<<}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\guillemetright{>>}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\guilsinglleft{<}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\guilsinglright{>}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\leq{<=}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\lbracechar{\{}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\minus{-}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\point{.}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\pounds{pounds}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\print{-|}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\quotedblbase{"}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\quotedblleft{"}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\quotedblright{"}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\quoteleft{`}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\quoteright{'}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\quotesinglbase{,}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\rbracechar{\}}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\registeredsymbol{R}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\result{=>}%
|
|||
|
|
\do\textdegree{o}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
|
|||
|
|
% Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
|
|||
|
|
% makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
|
|||
|
|
% writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
|
|||
|
|
% that starts with \.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
|
|||
|
|
% to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
|
|||
|
|
% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\macrolist
|
|||
|
|
\let\value\indexnofontsvalue
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Give the control sequence a definition that removes the {} that follows
|
|||
|
|
% its use, e.g. @AA{} -> AA
|
|||
|
|
\def\indexnofontsdef#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}}%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
|
|||
|
|
\def\doind#1#2{%
|
|||
|
|
\iflinks
|
|||
|
|
{%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\requireopenindexfile{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\indextext{#2}%
|
|||
|
|
\safewhatsit\doindwrite
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Same as \doind, but for code indices
|
|||
|
|
\def\docind#1#2{%
|
|||
|
|
\iflinks
|
|||
|
|
{%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\requireopenindexfile{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\indextext{#2}%
|
|||
|
|
\safewhatsit\docindwrite
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it.
|
|||
|
|
\def\requireopenindexfile#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
|||
|
|
\edef\suffix{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
% A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output
|
|||
|
|
% of -recorder, so use .f1s instead.
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi
|
|||
|
|
% Open the file
|
|||
|
|
\immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix
|
|||
|
|
% Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current
|
|||
|
|
% box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for
|
|||
|
|
% preceding skips.
|
|||
|
|
\typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi}
|
|||
|
|
\def\indexisfl{fl}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Definition for writing index entry sort key.
|
|||
|
|
{
|
|||
|
|
\catcode`\-=13
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\indexwritesortas{%
|
|||
|
|
\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\indexnonalnumreappear
|
|||
|
|
\indexwritesortasxxx}
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup}
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\indexwriteseealso#1{
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seealso{#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\indexwriteseeentry#1{
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seeentry{#1}}%
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% The default definitions
|
|||
|
|
\def\sortas#1{}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\seealso#1{\i{\putwordSeeAlso}\ #1}% for sorted index file only
|
|||
|
|
\def\putwordSeeAlso{See also}
|
|||
|
|
\def\seeentry#1{\i{\putwordSee}\ #1}% for sorted index file only
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Given index entry text like "aaa @subentry bbb @sortas{ZZZ}":
|
|||
|
|
% * Set \bracedtext to "{aaa}{bbb}"
|
|||
|
|
% * Set \fullindexsortkey to "aaa @subentry ZZZ"
|
|||
|
|
% * If @seealso occurs, set \pagenumbertext
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\splitindexentry#1{%
|
|||
|
|
\gdef\fullindexsortkey{}%
|
|||
|
|
\xdef\bracedtext{}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\sep{}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\seealso##1{}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\seeentry##1{}%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\doindexsegment#1\subentry\finish\subentry
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% append the results from the next segment
|
|||
|
|
\def\doindexsegment#1\subentry{%
|
|||
|
|
\def\segment{#1}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\segment\isfinish
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Fully expand the segment, throwing away any @sortas directives, and
|
|||
|
|
% trim spaces.
|
|||
|
|
\edef\trimmed{\segment}%
|
|||
|
|
\edef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifincodeindex
|
|||
|
|
\edef\trimmed{\noexpand\code{\trimmed}}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\xdef\bracedtext{\bracedtext{\trimmed}}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Get the string to sort by. Process the segment with all
|
|||
|
|
% font commands turned off.
|
|||
|
|
\bgroup
|
|||
|
|
\let\sortas\indexwritesortas
|
|||
|
|
\let\seealso\indexwriteseealso
|
|||
|
|
\let\seeentry\indexwriteseeentry
|
|||
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
|||
|
|
% The braces around the commands are recognized by texindex.
|
|||
|
|
\def\lbracechar{{\string\indexlbrace}}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\rbracechar{{\string\indexrbrace}}%
|
|||
|
|
\let\{=\lbracechar
|
|||
|
|
\let\}=\rbracechar
|
|||
|
|
\def\@{{\string\indexatchar}}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\atchar##1{\@}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\backslashchar{{\string\indexbackslash}}%
|
|||
|
|
\uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\let~\backslashchar}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\let\indexsortkey\empty
|
|||
|
|
\global\let\pagenumbertext\empty
|
|||
|
|
% Execute the segment and throw away the typeset output. This executes
|
|||
|
|
% any @sortas or @seealso commands in this segment.
|
|||
|
|
\setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\segment}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\indexsortkey\empty{%
|
|||
|
|
\indexnonalnumdisappear
|
|||
|
|
\xdef\trimmed{\segment}%
|
|||
|
|
\xdef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}%
|
|||
|
|
\xdef\indexsortkey{\trimmed}%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi
|
|||
|
|
}\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Append to \fullindexsortkey.
|
|||
|
|
\edef\tmp{\gdef\noexpand\fullindexsortkey{%
|
|||
|
|
\fullindexsortkey\sep\indexsortkey}}%
|
|||
|
|
\tmp
|
|||
|
|
\egroup
|
|||
|
|
\def\sep{\subentry}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\doindexsegment
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\def\isfinish{\finish}%
|
|||
|
|
\newbox\dummybox % used above
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\let\subentry\relax
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Use \ instead of @ in index files. To support old texi2dvi and texindex.
|
|||
|
|
% This works without changing the escape character used in the toc or aux
|
|||
|
|
% files because the index entries are fully expanded here, and \string uses
|
|||
|
|
% the current value of \escapechar.
|
|||
|
|
\def\escapeisbackslash{\escapechar=`\\}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Use \ in index files by default. texi2dvi didn't support @ as the escape
|
|||
|
|
% character (as it checked for "\entry" in the files, and not "@entry"). When
|
|||
|
|
% the new version of texi2dvi has had a chance to become more prevalent, then
|
|||
|
|
% the escape character can change back to @ again. This should be an easy
|
|||
|
|
% change to make now because both @ and \ are only used as escape characters in
|
|||
|
|
% index files, never standing for themselves.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\set txiindexescapeisbackslash
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Write the entry in \indextext to the index file.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\newif\ifincodeindex
|
|||
|
|
\def\doindwrite{\incodeindexfalse\doindwritex}
|
|||
|
|
\def\docindwrite{\incodeindextrue\doindwritex}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\doindwritex{%
|
|||
|
|
\maybemarginindex
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\atdummies
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax\else
|
|||
|
|
\escapeisbackslash
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% For texindex which always views { and } as separators.
|
|||
|
|
\def\{{\lbracechar{}}%
|
|||
|
|
\def\}{\rbracechar{}}%
|
|||
|
|
\uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\backslashchar{}}}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Split the entry into primary entry and any subentries, and get the index
|
|||
|
|
% sort key.
|
|||
|
|
\splitindexentry\indextext
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
|
|||
|
|
% the original text, including any font commands. We write
|
|||
|
|
% three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
|
|||
|
|
% subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
|
|||
|
|
% sorted result.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\edef\temp{%
|
|||
|
|
\write\writeto{%
|
|||
|
|
\string\entry{\fullindexsortkey}%
|
|||
|
|
{\ifx\pagenumbertext\empty\noexpand\folio\else\pagenumbertext\fi}%
|
|||
|
|
\bracedtext}%
|
|||
|
|
}%
|
|||
|
|
\temp
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired (undocumented).
|
|||
|
|
\def\maybemarginindex{%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
|
|||
|
|
\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \relax\indextext}}%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
}
|
|||
|
|
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
|
|||
|
|
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
|
|||
|
|
% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
|
|||
|
|
% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
|
|||
|
|
% sequences like this:
|
|||
|
|
% @end defun
|
|||
|
|
% @tindex whatever
|
|||
|
|
% @defun ...
|
|||
|
|
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
|
|||
|
|
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
|
|||
|
|
% the previous defun.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
|
|||
|
|
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% But wait, there is a catch there:
|
|||
|
|
% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
|
|||
|
|
% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
|
|||
|
|
% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
|
|||
|
|
% representation of the skip.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
|
|||
|
|
% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\newskip\whatsitskip
|
|||
|
|
\newcount\whatsitpenalty
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% ..., ready, GO:
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
|
|||
|
|
#1%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
|
|||
|
|
\whatsitskip = \lastskip
|
|||
|
|
\edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
|
|||
|
|
\whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
|
|||
|
|
% skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
|
|||
|
|
% -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
|
|||
|
|
% non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
|
|||
|
|
% breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\vskip-\whatsitskip
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
#1%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
|||
|
|
% If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
|
|||
|
|
% perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
|
|||
|
|
% to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
|
|||
|
|
% signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
|
|||
|
|
% following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
|
|||
|
|
% @deffn deffn-whatever
|
|||
|
|
% @vindex index-whatever
|
|||
|
|
% Description.
|
|||
|
|
% would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
|
|||
|
|
% and the "Description." paragraph.
|
|||
|
|
\ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
|
|||
|
|
% this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
|
|||
|
|
% (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
|
|||
|
|
\nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
|
|||
|
|
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
|
|||
|
|
% or
|
|||
|
|
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
|
|||
|
|
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
|
|||
|
|
% containing these kinds of lines:
|
|||
|
|
% \initial {c}
|
|||
|
|
% before the first topic whose initial is c
|
|||
|
|
% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
|
|||
|
|
% for a topic that is used without subtopics
|
|||
|
|
% \primary {topic}
|
|||
|
|
% \entry {topic}{}
|
|||
|
|
% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
|
|||
|
|
% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
|
|||
|
|
% for each subtopic.
|
|||
|
|
% \secondary {subtopic}{}
|
|||
|
|
% for a subtopic with sub-subtopics
|
|||
|
|
% \tertiary {subtopic}{subsubtopic}{pagelist}
|
|||
|
|
% for each sub-subtopic.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
|
|||
|
|
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
\def\findex {\fnindex}
|
|||
|
|
\def\kindex {\kyindex}
|
|||
|
|
\def\cindex {\cpindex}
|
|||
|
|
\def\vindex {\vrindex}
|
|||
|
|
\def\tindex {\tpindex}
|
|||
|
|
\def\pindex {\pgindex}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
|
|||
|
|
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
|
|||
|
|
\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
\smallfonts \rm
|
|||
|
|
\tolerance = 9500
|
|||
|
|
\plainfrenchspacing
|
|||
|
|
\everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% See comment in \requireopenindexfile.
|
|||
|
|
\def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi
|
|||
|
|
%
|
|||
|
|
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
|
|||
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s
|
|||
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
|
|||
|
|
% and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
|
|||
|
|
% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
|
|||
|
|
% there is some text.
|
|||
|
|
\putwordIndexNonexistent
|
|||
|
|
\typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}%
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
|
|||
|
|
% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
|
|||
|
|
% it can discover if there is anything in it.
|
|||
|
|
\read 1 to \thisline
|
|||
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
|||
|
|
\putwordIndexIsEmpty
|
|||
|
|
\else
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\printindexzz\thisline\relax\relax\finish%
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\fi
|
|||
|
|
\closein 1
|
|||
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
% If the index file starts with a backslash, forgo reading the index
|
|||
|
|
% file altogether. If somebody upgrades texinfo.tex they may still have
|
|||
|
|
% old index files using \ as the escape character. Reading this would
|
|||
|
|
% at best lead to typesetting garbage, at worst a TeX syntax error.
|
|||
|
|
\def\printindexzz#1#2\finish{%
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax
|
|||
|
|
\uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\if\noexpand~}\noexpand#1
|
|||
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiskipindexfileswithbackslash\endcsname\relax
|
|||
|
|
\errmessage{%
|
|||
|
|
ERROR: A sorted index file in an obsolete format was skipped.
|
|||
|
|
To fix this problem, please upgrade your version of 'texi2dvi'
|
|||
|
|
or 'texi2pdf' to that at <https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo>.
|
|||
|
|
If you are using an old version of 'texindex' (part of the Texinfo
|
|||
|
|
distribution), you may also need to upgrade to a newer version (at least 6.0).
|
|||
|
|
You may be able to typeset the index if you run
|
|||
|
|
'texindex \jobname.\indexname' yourself.
|
|||
|
|
You could also try setting the 'txiindexescapeisbackslash' flag by
|
|||
|
|
running a command like
|
|||
|
|
'texi2dvi -t "@set txiindexescapeisbackslash" \jobname.texi'. If you do
|
|||
|
|
this, Texinfo will try to use index files in the old format.
|
|||
|
|
If you continue to have problems, deleting the |